| all | frequencies |
|
exhibits | applications |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| manual |
| app s | submitted / available | |||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 |
|
Users Manual | Users Manual | 4.29 MiB | January 06 2011 | |||
| 1 | Cover Letter(s) | January 06 2011 | ||||||
| 1 | Cover Letter(s) | January 06 2011 | ||||||
| 1 | External Photos | January 06 2011 | ||||||
| 1 | Internal Photos | January 06 2011 | ||||||
| 1 | ID Label/Location Info | January 06 2011 | ||||||
| 1 | ID Label/Location Info | January 06 2011 | ||||||
| 1 | RF Exposure Info | January 06 2011 | ||||||
| 1 | Test Setup Photos | January 06 2011 | ||||||
| 1 | Test Report | January 06 2011 | ||||||
| 1 | Cover Letter(s) | January 06 2011 |
| 1 | Users Manual | Users Manual | 4.29 MiB | January 06 2011 |
P-873HNUP-51B 802.11n Wireless VDSL2 4-port Gateway Default Login Details IP Address User Name Password http://192.168.1.1 admin 1234 Firmware Version 1.10 Edition 1, 5/2011 www.zyxel.com www.zyxel.com Copyright 2011 ZyXEL Communications Corporation About This User's Guide About This User's Guide Intended Audience This manual is intended for people who want to configure the ZyXEL Device using the web configurator. Related Documentation Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide is designed to help you get up and running right away. It contains information on setting up your network and configuring for Internet access. Support Disc Refer to the included CD for support documents. Document Conventions Warnings and Notes These are how warnings and notes are shown in this Users Guide. Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device. Note: Notes tell you other important information (for example, other things you may need to configure or helpful tips) or recommendations. Syntax Conventions The P-873HNUP-51B may be referred to as the ZyXEL Device, the device, the system or the product in this Users Guide. Product labels, screen names, field labels and field choices are all in bold font. A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text, for example, [ENTER] means the enter or return key on your keyboard. Enter means for you to type one or more characters and then press the [ENTER] key. Select or choose means for you to use one of the predefined choices. A right angle bracket ( > ) within a screen name denotes a mouse click. For example, Maintenance > Log > Log Setting means you first click Maintenance in the navigation panel, then the Log sub menu and finally the Log Setting tab to get to that screen. Units of measurement may denote the metric value or the scientific value. For example, k for kilo may denote 1000 or 1024, M for mega may denote 1000000 or 1048576 and so on. e.g., is a shorthand for for instance, and i.e., means that is or in other words. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 3 Document Conventions Icons Used in Figures Figures in this Users Guide may use the following generic icons. The ZyXEL Device icon is not an exact representation of your device. ZyXEL Device Computer Notebook computer Server Firewall Telephone Router Switch 4 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Safety Warnings Safety Warnings Do NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. Do NOT expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids. Do NOT store things on the device. Do NOT install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device. Do NOT open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information. Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports. Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them. Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling. Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device. Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe). Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord. Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution. If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, remove it from the device and the power source. Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord. Contact your local vendor to order a new one. Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots, as insufficient airflow may harm your device. Use only No. 26 AWG (American Wire Gauge) or larger telecommunication line cord. Antenna Warning! This device meets ETSI and FCC certification requirements when using the included antenna(s). Only use the included antenna(s). This product is for indoor use only (utilisation intrieure exclusivement). Your product is marked with this symbol, which is known as the WEEE mark. WEEE stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment. It means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste. Used electrical and electronic equipment should be treated separately. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 5 Safety Warnings 6 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview Users Guide ........................................................................................................................... 19 Introducing the P-873HNUP-51B ...............................................................................................21 The Web Configurator ................................................................................................................29 Quick Start ..................................................................................................................................37 Tutorials .....................................................................................................................................39 Technical Reference .............................................................................................................. 63 Network Map and Status Screens ..............................................................................................65 Broadband ..................................................................................................................................71 Wireless .....................................................................................................................................87 Home Networking ..................................................................................................................... 115 Static Routing ...........................................................................................................................135 Quality of Service (QoS) ..........................................................................................................139 Network Address Translation (NAT) .........................................................................................159 Dynamic DNS Setup ................................................................................................................175 IGMP ........................................................................................................................................179 Interface Group ........................................................................................................................189 Firewall .....................................................................................................................................195 MAC Filter ................................................................................................................................203 Parental Control .......................................................................................................................205 Scheduler Rules .......................................................................................................................209 Certificates ............................................................................................................................... 211 Service Control .........................................................................................................................223 ARP Table ................................................................................................................................225 Logs ........................................................................................................................................227 Traffic Status ...........................................................................................................................231 IGMP Status ............................................................................................................................235
.................................................................................................................................................236 xDSL Statistics .........................................................................................................................237 Users Configuration .................................................................................................................241 Remote Management ...............................................................................................................245 Time Settings ...........................................................................................................................251 Logs Setting ............................................................................................................................253 Firmware Upgrade ...................................................................................................................257 Configuration ............................................................................................................................259 Diagnostic ................................................................................................................................262 Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................................267 Product Specifications ..............................................................................................................273 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 7 Contents Overview 8 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents About This User's Guide.......................................................................................................... 3 Document Conventions ...........................................................................................................3 Safety Warnings........................................................................................................................ 5 Contents Overview .................................................................................................................. 7 Table of Contents ..................................................................................................................... 9 Part I: Users Guide ................................................................................19 Chapter 1 Introducing the P-873HNUP-51B ........................................................................................... 21 1.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................21 1.2 Ways to Manage the ZyXEL Device ....................................................................................21 1.3 Good Habits for Managing the ZyXEL Device .....................................................................22 1.4 Applications for the ZyXEL Device ......................................................................................22 1.4.1 Internet Access ...........................................................................................................22 1.4.2 HomePNA ...................................................................................................................23 1.5 LEDs (Lights) .......................................................................................................................25 1.6 The RESET Button ...............................................................................................................26 1.7 Wireless Access ...................................................................................................................27 1.7.1 Using the WLAN/WPS Button ....................................................................................27 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator ............................................................................................................ 29 2.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................29 2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator ................................................................................29 2.2 Web Configurator Layout .....................................................................................................32 2.2.1 Title Bar ......................................................................................................................32 2.2.2 Main Window ..............................................................................................................33 2.2.3 Navigation Panel ........................................................................................................33 Chapter 3 Quick Start............................................................................................................................... 37 3.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................37 3.2 Quick Start Setup .................................................................................................................37 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 9 Table of Contents Chapter 4 Tutorials................................................................................................................................... 39 4.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................39 4.2 Setting Up an ADSL PPPoE Connection .............................................................................39 4.3 HomePNA Example Setup ...................................................................................................42 4.4 Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network ................................................................................44 4.4.1 Configuring the Wireless Network Settings ................................................................44 4.4.2 Using WPS .................................................................................................................46 4.4.3 Without WPS ..............................................................................................................49 4.5 Setting Up Multiple Wireless Groups ...................................................................................50 4.6 Setting Up NAT Port Forwarding ..........................................................................................53 4.7 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network ....................................................55 4.8 Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup ...........................................................................57 4.9 Access the ZyXEL Device Using DDNS ..............................................................................60 4.9.1 Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org .....................................................61 4.9.2 Configuring DDNS on Your ZyXEL Device .................................................................61 4.9.3 Testing the DDNS Setting ...........................................................................................61 Part II: Technical Reference...................................................................63 Chapter 5 Network Map and Status Screens ......................................................................................... 65 5.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................65 5.2 The Network Map Screen ....................................................................................................65 5.3 The Status Screen ................................................................................................................67 Chapter 6 Broadband............................................................................................................................... 71 6.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................71 6.1.1 What You Need to Know .............................................................................................71 6.1.2 Before You Begin ........................................................................................................72 6.2 The Broadband Screen ........................................................................................................73 6.2.1 Add/Edit Broadband ...................................................................................................74 6.3 The DSL Screen ...................................................................................................................80 6.4 Technical Reference .............................................................................................................82 6.4.1 Encapsulation .............................................................................................................82 6.4.2 Multiplexing .................................................................................................................83 6.4.3 VPI and VCI ................................................................................................................83 6.4.4 IP Address Assignment ..............................................................................................83 6.4.5 NAT .............................................................................................................................84 6.4.6 Traffic Shaping ............................................................................................................84 10 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Table of Contents 6.4.7 ATM Traffic Classes ....................................................................................................84 6.4.8 Introduction to VLANs ................................................................................................85 Chapter 7 Wireless ................................................................................................................................... 87 7.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................87 7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ...............................................................................87 7.1.2 What You Need to Know .............................................................................................88 7.2 The General Screen ............................................................................................................88 7.2.1 No Security .................................................................................................................90 7.2.2 Basic (WEP Encryption) .............................................................................................91 7.2.3 More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK) .......................................................................................93 7.2.4 WPA(2) Authentication ................................................................................................94 7.3 The More AP Screen ............................................................................................................95 7.3.1 Edit More AP .............................................................................................................96 7.4 MAC Authentication .............................................................................................................97 7.5 The WPS Screen .................................................................................................................98 7.6 The Others Screen .............................................................................................................100 7.7 Technical Reference ...........................................................................................................101 7.7.1 Wireless Network Overview ......................................................................................101 7.7.2 Additional Wireless Terms ........................................................................................103 7.7.3 Wireless Security Overview ......................................................................................103 7.7.4 Signal Problems .......................................................................................................105 7.7.5 BSS ..........................................................................................................................106 7.7.6 MBSSID ....................................................................................................................106 7.7.7 Preamble Type .........................................................................................................107 7.7.8 WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) ....................................................................................107 Chapter 8 Home Networking ................................................................................................................. 115 8.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 115 8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ............................................................................. 115 8.1.2 What You Need To Know .......................................................................................... 116 8.1.3 Before You Begin ...................................................................................................... 117 8.2 The LAN Setup Screen ...................................................................................................... 117 8.3 The Static DHCP Screen .................................................................................................... 119 8.4 The UPnP Screen ..............................................................................................................121 8.5 Installing UPnP in Windows Example ................................................................................121 8.6 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example ...............................................................................124 8.7 The STB Vendor ID Screen ................................................................................................129 8.8 The HPNA Screen ..............................................................................................................130 8.9 The 5th Ethernet Port Screen ............................................................................................130 8.10 The LAN VLAN Screen ....................................................................................................131 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 11 Table of Contents 8.11 Technical Reference .........................................................................................................132 8.11.1 LANs, WANs and the ZyXEL Device ......................................................................132 8.11.2 DHCP Setup ...........................................................................................................132 8.11.3 DNS Server Addresses ...........................................................................................133 8.11.4 LAN TCP/IP ............................................................................................................133 Chapter 9 Static Routing........................................................................................................................ 135 9.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................135 9.2 The Routing Screen ...........................................................................................................136 9.2.1 Add/Edit Static Route ...............................................................................................137 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS).......................................................................................................139 10.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................139 10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ...........................................................................139 10.2 What You Need to Know ..................................................................................................140 10.3 The Quality of Service General Screen ...........................................................................141 10.4 The Queue Setup Screen ................................................................................................143 10.4.1 Adding a QoS Queue ............................................................................................144 10.5 The Class Setup Screen .................................................................................................145 10.5.1 Add/Edit QoS Class ...............................................................................................147 10.6 The QoS Policer Setup Screen ........................................................................................150 10.6.1 Add/Edit a QoS Policer ..........................................................................................151 10.7 The QoS Monitor Screen ................................................................................................152 10.8 Technical Reference .........................................................................................................153 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT).................................................................................... 159 11.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................159 11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ...........................................................................159 11.1.2 What You Need To Know ........................................................................................159 11.2 The Port Forwarding Screen ...........................................................................................160 11.2.1 Add/Edit Port Forwarding .......................................................................................162 11.3 The Applications Screen ..................................................................................................163 11.3.1 Add New Application ...............................................................................................164 11.4 The Port Triggering Screen ..............................................................................................164 11.4.1 Add/Edit Port Triggering Rule ................................................................................166 11.5 The DMZ Screen ..............................................................................................................167 11.6 The ALG Screen ...............................................................................................................168 11.7 The Sessions Screen .......................................................................................................169 11.8 Technical Reference .........................................................................................................169 11.8.1 NAT Definitions .......................................................................................................169 12 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Table of Contents 11.8.2 What NAT Does ......................................................................................................170 11.8.3 How NAT Works ......................................................................................................171 11.8.4 NAT Application ......................................................................................................172 Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS Setup ............................................................................................................. 175 12.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................175 12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ...........................................................................176 12.1.2 What You Need To Know ........................................................................................176 12.2 The DNS Entry Screen .....................................................................................................176 12.2.1 Add/Edit DNS Entry ................................................................................................177 12.3 The Dynamic DNS Screen ...............................................................................................178 Chapter 13 IGMP....................................................................................................................................... 179 13.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................179 13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ...........................................................................179 13.1.2 What You Need to Know .........................................................................................179 13.2 The IGMP General Screen ...............................................................................................181 13.3 IGMP Filter Configuration .................................................................................................182 13.3.1 IGMP Host Limitation Edit .......................................................................................184 13.3.2 IGMP Service Add ..................................................................................................184 13.3.3 IGMP Host Limitation Add ......................................................................................185 13.4 IGMP ACL Configuration ..................................................................................................186 13.4.1 IGMP ACL Add .......................................................................................................187 Chapter 14 Interface Group ..................................................................................................................... 189 14.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................189 14.2 The Interface Group Screen .............................................................................................189 14.2.1 Interface Group Configuration ................................................................................190 14.2.2 Interface Grouping Criteria ....................................................................................192 Chapter 15 Firewall .................................................................................................................................. 195 15.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................195 15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ...........................................................................195 15.1.2 What You Need to Know .........................................................................................195 15.2 The Firewall Screen .........................................................................................................197 15.3 The Protocol Screen .......................................................................................................197 15.3.1 Add a Protocol ......................................................................................................199 15.4 The Access Control Screen .............................................................................................200 15.4.1 Add/Edit an ACL Rule ...........................................................................................201 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 13 Table of Contents Chapter 16 MAC Filter.............................................................................................................................. 203 16.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................203 16.2 The MAC Filter Screen .....................................................................................................203 Chapter 17 Parental Control.................................................................................................................... 205 17.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................205 17.2 The Parental Control Screen ............................................................................................205 17.2.1 Add/Edit Parental Control Rule ...............................................................................206 Chapter 18 Scheduler Rules.................................................................................................................... 209 18.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................209 18.2 The Scheduler Rules Screen ...........................................................................................209 18.2.1 Add/Edit a Schedule ...............................................................................................210 Chapter 19 Certificates ............................................................................................................................ 211 19.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 211 19.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................... 211 19.2 What You Need to Know .................................................................................................. 211 19.3 The Local Certificates Screen ..........................................................................................212 19.3.1 Create Certificate Request ....................................................................................213 19.3.2 Load Signed Certificate .........................................................................................214 19.3.3 Import Certificate ...................................................................................................215 19.3.4 Certificate Details ..................................................................................................217 19.4 The Trusted CA Screen ...................................................................................................219 19.4.1 View Trusted CA Certificate ....................................................................................220 19.4.2 Import Trusted CA Certificate .................................................................................221 Chapter 20 Service Control ..................................................................................................................... 223 20.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................223 20.2 The Service Control Screen .............................................................................................223 Chapter 21 ARP Table .............................................................................................................................. 225 21.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................225 21.1.1 How ARP Works .....................................................................................................225 21.2 ARP Table Screen ............................................................................................................225 14 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Table of Contents Chapter 22 Logs ...................................................................................................................................... 227 22.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................227 22.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ...........................................................................227 22.1.2 What You Need To Know ........................................................................................227 22.2 The System Log Screen ...................................................................................................228 22.3 The Security Log Screen ..................................................................................................229 Chapter 23 Traffic Status ........................................................................................................................ 231 23.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................231 23.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ...........................................................................231 23.2 The WAN Status Screen ..................................................................................................231 23.3 The LAN Status Screen ....................................................................................................233 23.4 The HPNA Status Screen .................................................................................................234 Chapter 24 IGMP Status .......................................................................................................................... 235 24.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................235 24.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ...........................................................................235 24.2 The IGMP Group Screen .................................................................................................235 24.3 IGMP Statistics Screen ....................................................................................................236
................................................................................................................................................ 236 Chapter 25 xDSL Statistics...................................................................................................................... 237 25.1 The xDSL Statistics Screen ..............................................................................................237 Chapter 26 Users Configuration ............................................................................................................. 241 26.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................241 26.2 The Users Configuration Screen ......................................................................................241 26.2.1 Add/Edit a Users Account .......................................................................................242 Chapter 27 Remote Management............................................................................................................ 245 27.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................245 27.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ...........................................................................245 27.2 The TR-069 Clients Screen ..............................................................................................245 27.3 The TR-064 Screen ..........................................................................................................247 27.4 The SNMP Agent Screen .................................................................................................247 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 15 Table of Contents Chapter 28 Time Settings ........................................................................................................................ 251 28.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................251 28.2 The Time Setting Screen ................................................................................................251 Chapter 29 Logs Setting ......................................................................................................................... 253 29.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................253 29.2 The Logs Setting Screen ..................................................................................................253 29.2.1 Example E-mail Log ...............................................................................................255 Chapter 30 Firmware Upgrade ................................................................................................................ 257 30.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................257 30.2 The Firmware Screen .......................................................................................................257 Chapter 31 Configuration ........................................................................................................................ 259 31.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................259 31.2 The Configuration Screen ................................................................................................259 31.3 The Reboot Screen ..........................................................................................................261 Chapter 32 Diagnostic ............................................................................................................................. 262 32.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................262 32.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ...........................................................................262 32.2 What You Need to Know ..................................................................................................262 32.3 Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup ......................................................................................263 32.4 802.1ag ............................................................................................................................264 32.5 OAM Ping Test .................................................................................................................265 Chapter 33 Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................... 267 33.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs .......................................................................267 33.2 ZyXEL Device Access and Login .....................................................................................268 33.3 Internet Access ................................................................................................................269 33.4 Wireless Internet Access ..................................................................................................271 Chapter 34 Product Specifications.........................................................................................................273 34.1 Hardware Specifications ...................................................................................................273 34.2 Firmware Specifications ...................................................................................................274 16 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Table of Contents Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address........................................................... 279 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting........................................................................... 301 Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions ....................................... 309 Appendix D Wireless LANs.................................................................................................. 319 Appendix E Services............................................................................................................ 333 Appendix F Open Software Announcements....................................................................... 337 Appendix G Legal Information ............................................................................................. 347 Index ...................................................................................................................................... 351 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 17 Table of Contents 18 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide PART I Users Guide 19 20 CHAPTER 1 Introducing the P-873HNUP-51B 1.1 Overview The P-873HNUP-51B is a wireless VDSL router and Gigabit Ethernet gateway with Home Phoneline Networking Alliance (HPNA) capability. It has two DSL ports and a Gigabit Ethernet port for super-
fast Internet access over analog (POTS) telephone lines. If the DSLAM of the ISP supports bonding function, the two DSL ports on the P-873HNUP-51B can be connected to two separate telephone jacks to provide increased throughput at longer distances. The ZyXEL Device supports both Packet Transfer Mode (PTM) and Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM). It is backward compatible with ADSL, ADSL2 and ADSL2+ in case VDSL is not available. The P-873HNUP-51B also provides IEEE 802.11b/g/n wireless networking to extend the range of your existing wired network without additional wiring. Please refer to the following description of the product name format. H denotes an integrated 4-port switch (hub). N denotes 802.11n draft 2.0. The N models support 802.11n wireless connection mode. U denotes a USB port. The ZyXEL Device supports a flash disk (FAT16/FAT32 format), which FTP clients can access. P denotes a device that has Home Phoneline Networking Alliance (HPNA) capability. Model names ending in 1, for example P-873HNUP-51, denote a device that works over the analog telephone system, POTS (Plain Old Telephone Service). The DSL RJ-14 connects to your ADSL-enabled telephone lines. Only use firmware for your ZyXEL Devices specific model. Refer to the label on the bottom of your ZyXEL Device. See Chapter 34 on page 273 for a full list of features. 1.2 Ways to Manage the ZyXEL Device Use any of the following methods to manage the ZyXEL Device. Web Configurator. This is recommended for everyday management of the ZyXEL Device using a
(supported) web browser. TR-069. This is an auto-configuration server used to remotely configure your device. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 21 Chapter 1 Introducing the P-873HNUP-51B 1.3 Good Habits for Managing the ZyXEL Device Do the following things regularly to make the ZyXEL Device more secure and to manage the ZyXEL Device more effectively. Change the password. Use a password thats not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters, such as numbers and letters. Write down the password and put it in a safe place. Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it). Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes. If you forget your password, you will have to reset the ZyXEL Device to its factory default settings. If you backed up an earlier configuration file, you would not have to totally re-configure the ZyXEL Device. You could simply restore your last configuration. 1.4 Applications for the ZyXEL Device Here are some example uses for which the ZyXEL Device is well suited. 1.4.1 Internet Access Your ZyXEL Device provides shared Internet access by connecting the DSL port to the DSL or MODEM jack on a splitter or your telephone jack. You can have up to eight WAN services over one ADSL, VDSL or Ethernet WAN line. The ZyXEL Device cannot work in ADSL, VDSL and Ethernet WAN mode at the same time. Note: The ADSL, VDSL and Ethernet WAN lines share the same eight WAN (layer-3) interfaces that you configure in the ZyXEL Device. Refer to Section 6.2 on page 73 for the Network Settings> Broadband screen. 22 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the P-873HNUP-51B Computers can connect to the ZyXEL Devices LAN ports (or wirelessly). Figure 1 ZyXEL Devices Internet Access Application WLAN LAN WLAN LAN WLAN LAN Bridging IPoE PPPoE ADSL / VDSL IPoA / PPPoA ADSL Bridging IPoE PPPoE Ethernet WAN WAN WAN DSL A A A You can also configure IP filtering on the ZyXEL Device for secure Internet access. When the IP filter is on, all incoming traffic from the Internet to your network is blocked by default unless it is initiated from your network. This means that probes from the outside to your network are not allowed, but you can safely browse the Internet and download files. 1.4.2 HomePNA The ZyXEL Device complies with HomePNA (Home Phoneline Networking Alliance, also known as HPNA) 3.1, a home networking technology for carrying data over existing coaxial cables and telephone wiring. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 23 Chapter 1 Introducing the P-873HNUP-51B The figure below shows your ZyXEL Device (A) connecting to a phone line outlet for DSL Internet access and a coaxial outlet to relay Internet connectivity to other coaxial outlets in the building. The laptop (B) connects wirelessly to the ZyXEL Device. The set-up box (C) connects into a coaxial outlet in another part of the house for access to online videos. Figure 2 HomePNA Application 24 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the P-873HNUP-51B 1.5 LEDs (Lights) The following graphic displays the labels of the LEDs. Figure 3 LEDs on the Device None of the LEDs are on if the ZyXEL Device is not receiving power. Table 1 LED Descriptions LED POWER COLOR Green STATUS On DESCRIPTION The ZyXEL Device is receiving power and ready for use. Blinking The ZyXEL Device is self-testing. Red On Off The ZyXEL Device detected an error while self-testing, or there is a device malfunction. The ZyXEL Device is not receiving power. Blinking Firmware upgrade is in progress. ETHERNET 1-4 Green On The ZyXEL Device has a successful 100 Mbps Ethernet connection with a device on the Local Area Network (LAN). Blinking The ZyXEL Device is sending or receiving data to/from the LAN at 100 Mbps. Off The ZyXEL Device does not have an Ethernet connection with the LAN. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 25 Chapter 1 Introducing the P-873HNUP-51B Table 1 LED Descriptions (continued) LED ETHERNET WAN STATUS On COLOR Green Blinking DESCRIPTION The Gigabit Ethernet connection is working. The ZyXEL Device is sending or receiving data to/from the Gigabit Ethernet link. USB Green Off On There is no Gigabit Ethernet link. The ZyXEL Device recognizes a USB connection. Blinking The ZyXEL Device is sending/receiving data to /from the USB device connected to it. DSL1,2 Green Off On The ZyXEL Device does not detect a USB connection. The ADSL line is up. Blinking The ZyXEL Device is initializing the ADSL line. Orange Off On The ADSL line is down. The VDSL line is up. Blinking The ZyXEL Device is initializing the VDSL line. INTERNET Green Off On The VDSL line is down. The ZyXEL Device has an IP connection but no traffic. Your device has a WAN IP address (either static or assigned by a DHCP server), PPP negotiation was successfully completed (if used) and the DSL connection is up. HPNA Green Blinking The ZyXEL Device is sending or receiving IP traffic. Off On There is no Internet connection or the gateway is in bridged mode. The ZyXEL Device is connected to an HPNA-equipped device through the coaxial cable. Blinking Data is transmitting over the HPNA cable. WLAN/WPS Green Off On No HPNA device is connected. The wireless network is activated. Blinking The ZyXEL Device is communicating with other wireless clients. Blinking The ZyXEL Device is setting up a WPS connection. Green and Orange Off The wireless network is not activated. 1.6 The RESET Button If you forget your password or cannot access the web configurator, you will need to use the RESET button at the back of the device to reload the factory-default configuration file. This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously and the password will be reset to 1234. 1 Make sure the POWER LED is on (not blinking). 2 To set the device back to the factory default settings, press the RESET button for ten seconds or until the POWER LED begins to blink and then release it. When the POWER LED begins to blink, the defaults have been restored and the device restarts. 26 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the P-873HNUP-51B 1.7 Wireless Access The ZyXEL Device is a wireless Access Point (AP) for wireless clients, such as notebook computers or PDAs and iPads. It allows them to connect to the Internet without having to rely on inconvenient Ethernet cables. You can configure your wireless network in either the built-in Web Configurator, or using the WPS button. Figure 4 Wireless Access Example 1.7.1 Using the WLAN/WPS Button If the wireless network is turned off, press the WLAN/WPS button on the front of the ZyXEL Device for two seconds. Once the WLAN/WPS LED turns green, the wireless network is active. You can also use the WLAN/WPS button to quickly set up a secure wireless connection between the ZyXEL Device and a WPS-compatible client by adding one device at a time. To activate WPS:
1 Make sure the POWER LED is on and not blinking. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 27 Chapter 1 Introducing the P-873HNUP-51B 2 Press the WLAN/WPS button for five seconds and release it. 3 Press the WPS button on another WPS-enabled device within range of the ZyXEL Device. The WLAN/WPS LED flashes green and orange while the ZyXEL Device sets up a WPS connection with the other wireless device. 4 Once the connection is successfully made, the WLAN/WPS LED shines green. To turn off the wireless network, press the WLAN/WPS button on the front of the ZyXEL Device for one to five seconds. The WLAN/WPS LED turns off when the wireless network is off. 28 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide CHAPTER 2 The Web Configurator 2.1 Overview The web configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy device setup and management via Internet browser. Use Internet Explorer 6.0 and later versions or Mozilla Firefox 3 and later versions or Safari 2.0 and later versions. The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels. In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:
Web browser pop-up windows from your device. Web pop-up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2. JavaScript (enabled by default). Java permissions (enabled by default). See Appendix C on page 309 if you need to make sure these functions are allowed in Internet Explorer. 2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator 1 Make sure your ZyXEL Device hardware is properly connected (refer to the Quick Start Guide). 2 3 Launch your web browser. If the ZyXEL Device does not automatically re-direct you to the login screen, go to http://192.168.1.1. A password screen displays. To access the administrative web configurator and manage the ZyXEL Device, type the default username admin and password 1234 in the password screen and click Login. If advanced account security is enabled (see Section 26.2 on page 241) the number of dots that appears when you type the password changes randomly to prevent anyone watching the P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 29 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator password field from knowing the length of your password. If you have changed the password, enter your password and click Login. For security reasons, you will be temporarily denied access to the ZyXEL Device for a period of time (15 minutes by default) if you have entered the incorrect username and password for a certain number of times (three times by default). Figure 5 Password Screen 4 A welcome screen appears showing a summary of your last login, such as the time, number of failed login attempts, and when the password expires. It also shows if you are logged on from an IP address. Select Show this page next time to see the welcome screen on your next login. Otherwise, deselect it. Click Continue. Figure 6 Welcome Screen 30 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 5 The Network Map page appears. Figure 7 Network Map Chapter 2 The Web Configurator Note: For security reasons, the ZyXEL Device automatically logs you out if you do not use the web configurator for ten minutes (default). If this happens, log in again. 6 Click Status to display the Status screen, where you can view the ZyXEL Devices interface and system information. Note: It is strongly recommended you change the default password. You can do so in the Maintenance > Users Configuration screen. See Chapter 26 on page 241 for more information. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 31 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator 2.2 Web Configurator Layout Figure 8 Screen Layout A B C As illustrated above, the main screen is divided into these parts:
A - title bar B - main window C - navigation panel 2.2.1 Title Bar The title bar provides some icons in the upper right corner. 32 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 2 The Web Configurator The icons provide the following functions. Table 2 Web Configurator Icons in the Title Bar ICON DESCRIPTION Quick Start: Click this icon to open screens where you can configure the ZyXEL Devices time zone Internet access, and wireless settings. Logout: Click this icon to log out of the web configurator. 2.2.2 Main Window The main window displays information and configuration fields. It is discussed in the rest of this document. After you click Status on the Network Map page, the Status screen is displayed. See Chapter 5 on page 67 for more information about the Status screen. If you click Virtual Device on the Status screen, a visual graphic appears, showing the connection status of the ZyXEL Devices ports. The connected ports are in color and disconnected ports are gray. If you click Network Map on the Status screen, the Network Map screen appears. See Chapter 5 on page 65 for more information about the Network Map screen. 2.2.3 Navigation Panel Use the menu items on the navigation panel to open screens to configure ZyXEL Device features. The following tables describe each menu item. Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary LINK Network Map TAB Network Settings Broadband Broadband FUNCTION This screen shows the network status of the ZyXEL Device and computers/
devices connected to it. Use this screen to enable PTM over ADSL, view and configure ISP parameters, WAN IP address assignment, and other advanced properties. You can also add new WAN connections. Wireless DSL General Use this screen to enable and configure the DSL bonding function. Use this screen to configure the wireless LAN settings and WLAN authentication/security settings. More AP Use this screen to configure multiple BSSs on the ZyXEL Device. MAC Authentication Use this screen to block or allow wireless traffic from wireless devices of certain SSIDs and MAC addresses to the ZyXEL Device. WPS Use this screen to configure and view your WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) settings. Others Use this screen to configure advanced wireless settings. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 33 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary (continued) FUNCTION LINK Use this screen to configure LAN TCP/IP settings, and other advanced properties. TAB LAN Setup Home Networking Static DHCP Use this screen to assign specific IP addresses to individual MAC addresses. UPnP Use this screen to turn UPnP and UPnP NAT-T on or off. STB Vendor ID Use this screen to have the ZyXEL Device automatically create static DHCP entries for Set Top Box (STB) devices when they request IP addresses. HPNA Use this screen to enable or disable the HPNA port. 5th Ethernet Port LAN VLAN Use this screen to configure the Ethernet WAN port as a LAN port. Use this screen to control the VLAN ID and IEEE 802.1p priority tags of traffic sent out through individual LAN ports. Routing Static Route Use this screen to view and set up static routes on the ZyXEL Device. Policy Forwarding General QoS Use this screen to configure policy routing on the ZyXEL Device. Use this screen to enable QoS and traffic prioritizing. You can also configure the QoS rules and actions. Queue Setup Use this screen to configure QoS queues. Class Setup Use this screen to define a classifier. Policer Setup Use these screens to configure QoS policers. Monitor Use this screen to view QoS packets statistics. NAT Port Forwarding Use this screen to make your local servers visible to the outside world. Applications Use this screen to configure servers behind the ZyXEL Device. Port Triggering Use this screen to change your ZyXEL Devices port triggering settings. DMZ ALG Sessions Use this screen to configure a default server which receives packets from ports that are not specified in the Port Forwarding screen. Use this screen to enable or disable SIP ALG. Use this screen to limit the number of NAT sessions a single client can establish. DNS Setting DNS Entry Use this screen to view and configure DNS routes. Dynamic DNS Use this screen to allow a static hostname alias for a dynamic IP address. IGMP Setting General Use this screen to configure general IGMP proxy and IGMP packet processing settings. Interface Group Security Settings Firewall IGMP Filter IGMP ACL Use this screen to control IGMP access. Use this screen to block or allow access to specific multicast media channels. Interface Group Use this screen to map a port to a PVC or bridge group. General Protocol Use this screen to configure the security level of your firewall. Use this screen to add or remove predefined Internet services and configure firewall rules. Access Control Use this screen to enable specific traffic directions for network services. MAC Filter MAC Filter Use this screen to block or allow traffic from devices of certain MAC addresses to the ZyXEL Device. 34 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 2 The Web Configurator Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary (continued) FUNCTION LINK TAB Parental Control Use this screen to block web sites with the specific URL. Parental Control Scheduler Rule Scheduler Rule Use this screen to configure the days and times when a configured restriction (such as parental control) is enforced. Certificates Local Certificates Use this screen to view a summary list of certificates and manage certificates and certification requests. Trusted CA Use this screen to view and manage the list of the trusted CAs. Service Control Service Control Use this screen to control service access to the ZyXEL Device. System Monitor ARP Table ARP Table Use this screen to view the ARP table. It displays the IP and MAC address of each DHCP connection. Log System Log Use this screen to view the status of events that occurred to the ZyXEL Device. You can export or e-mail the logs. Security Log Use this screen to view the login record of the ZyXEL Device. You can export or e-mail the logs. Traffic Status WAN LAN HPNA Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going through the WAN port of the ZyXEL Device. Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going through the LAN ports of the ZyXEL Device. Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going through the HPNA port of the ZyXEL Device. IGMP Group Status IGMP Group Use this screen to view the status of all IGMP settings on the ZyXEL Device. IGMP Statistics Use this screen to view the ZyXEL Devices IGMP multicast group and IGMP traffic statistics. xDSL Statistics xDSL Statistics Use this screen to view the ZyXEL Devices xDSL traffic statistics. Maintenance Users Configuration Users Configuration Remote MGMT TR-069 Client Use this screen to add and configure user accounts on the ZyXEL Device. Use this screen to configure the ZyXEL Device to be managed by an Auto Configuration Server (ACS). TR-064 Client Use this screen to enable management via TR-064 on the LAN. SNMP Agent Use this screen to configure your ZyXEL Devices settings for Simple Network Management Protocol management. Time Setting Time Setting Use this screen to change your ZyXEL Devices time and date. Log Setting Log Setting Use this screen to change your ZyXEL Devices log settings. Firmware Upgrade Firmware Upgrade Configuration Configuration Use this screen to upload firmware to your device. Use this screen to backup and restore your devices configuration
(settings) or reset the factory default settings. Reboot Reboot Use this screen to reboot the ZyXEL Device without turning the power off. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 35 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary (continued) FUNCTION LINK Use this screen to identify problems with the DSL connection. You can use Ping, TraceRoute, or Nslookup to help you identify problems. Diagnostic TAB Ping &
TraceRoute &
NsLookup 802.1ag OAM Ping Use this screen to configure CFM (Connectivity Fault Management) MD
(maintenance domain) and MA (maintenance association), perform connectivity tests and view test reports. These screen displays information to help you identify problems with the DSL connection. 36 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide CHAPTER 3 Quick Start 3.1 Overview Use the Quick Start screens to configure the ZyXEL Devices time zone and basic Internet access and wireless settings. Note: See the technical reference chapters (starting on page 63) for background information on the features in this chapter. 3.2 Quick Start Setup 1 Click the Click Start icon in the top right corner of the web configurator to open the quick start screens. Select the time zone of the ZyXEL Devices location and click Next. Figure 9 Time Zone P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 37 Chapter 3 Quick Start 2 3 Enter your PPPoE accounts user name and password exactly as provided by your Internet Service Provider (ISP). If your ISP also gave you static IP address settings to use, select Yes and enter them in the fields that display. Click Next. Figure 10 Internet Connection Turn the wireless LAN on or off. If you keep it on, record the security settings so you can configure your wireless clients to connect to the ZyXEL Device. Click Save. Figure 11 Internet Connection 4 Your ZyXEL Device saves your settings and attempts to connect to the Internet. 38 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide CHAPTER 4 Tutorials 4.1 Overview This chapter shows you how to use the ZyXEL Devices various features. Setting Up an ADSL PPPoE Connection, see page 39 HomePNA Example Setup, see page 42 Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network, see page 44 Setting Up Multiple Wireless Groups, see page 50 Setting Up NAT Port Forwarding, see page 53 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network, see page 55 Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup, see page 57 Access the ZyXEL Device Using DDNS, see page 60 4.2 Setting Up an ADSL PPPoE Connection This tutorial shows you how to set up your Internet connection using the Web Configurator. If you connect to the Internet through an ADSL connection, use the information from your Internet Service Provider (ISP) to configure the ZyXEL Device. Be sure to contact your service provider for any information you need to configure the Broadband screens. 1 Click Network Settings > Broadband to open the following screen. Click Add New WAN Interface. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 39 Chapter 4 Tutorials 2 In this example, the DSL connection has the following information. General Connection Name MyDSLConnection Type Connection Mode Encapsulation ATM PVC Configuration VPI/VCI ADSL over ATM Routing PPPoE 36/48 Encapsulation Mode LLC/SNAP-Bridging Service Category UBR without PCR Account Information PPP User Name PPP Password 1234@DSL-Ex.com ABCDEF!
PPPoE Service Name MyDSL Static IP Address 192.168.1.32 Others PPPoE Passthrough: Disabled NAT: Enabled IGMP Multicast Proxy: Enabled Apply as Default Gateway: Enabled 3 4 5 Select the Active check box. Enter the General and ATM PVC Configuration settings as provided above. Set the Type to ADSL over ATM. Choose the Encapsulation specified by your DSL service provider. For this example, the service provider requires a username and password to establish Internet connection. Therefore, select PPPoE as the WAN encapsulation type. Enter the account information provided to you by your DSL service provider. Configure this rule as your default Internet connection by selecting the Apply as Default Gateway check box. Then select DNS as Static and enter the DNS server addresses provided to you, such as 192.168.5.2 (DNS server1)/192.168.5.1 (DNS server2). 40 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 6 Click Apply to save your settings. Chapter 4 Tutorials P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 41 Chapter 4 Tutorials 7 You should see a summary of your new DSL connection setup in the Broadband screen as follows. Try to connect to a website, such as zyxel.com to see if you have correctly set up your Internet connection. Be sure to contact your service provider for any information you need to configure the WAN screens. 4.3 HomePNA Example Setup This tutorial shows you how you can use the ZyXEL Devices HomePNA feature to connect a television in another part of the house to the Internet through the coaxial port. You will need:
a Set-Top Box (STB) HomePNA Ethernet Bridge a television; and an active Video On Demand (VOD)/Internet Protocol Television (IPTV) subscription 42 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide The figure below shows the hardware setup for this tutorial:
Chapter 4 Tutorials 1 2 4 3 5 1 2 3 4 5 Log into the ZyXEL Devices Web Configurator. Go to the Network Settings > HPNA screen. Select Enable in the State field to enable your HPNA port. Connect your ZyXEL Device to the Internet source. This could be either DSL or Ethernet. Connect the ZyXEL Devices coaxial port a coaxial outlet in your house. This relays Internet connectivity to other coaxial outlets in other parts of the house. In the room where your television is located, connect the HomePNA bridge to a coaxial outlet. 6 Using an Ethernet cable, connect the HomePNA bridge device to the STB. This grants Internet access to the STB. 7 Refer to the users guide of your STB for information on how to connect it to your television, as well as configure your account settings on it. You should now be able to watch online videos in your television using your VOD or IPTV subscription. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 43 Chapter 4 Tutorials 4.4 Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network Thomas wants to set up a wireless network so that he can use his notebook to access the Internet. In this wireless network, the ZyXEL Device serves as an access point (AP), and the notebook is the wireless client. The wireless client can access the Internet through the AP. Thomas has to configure the wireless network settings on the ZyXEL Device. Then he can set up a wireless network using WPS (Section 4.4.2 on page 46) or manual configuration (Section 4.4.3 on page 49). 4.4.1 Configuring the Wireless Network Settings This example uses the following parameters to set up a wireless network. SSID Security Mode Example WPA-PSK Pre-Shared Key DoNotStealMyWirelessNetwork 802.11 Mode 802.11b/g/n Mixed 44 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 1 Click Network Settings > Wireless to open the General screen. Select More Secure as the security level and WPA-PSK as the security mode. Configure the screen using the provided parameters (see page 44). Click Apply. Chapter 4 Tutorials 2 Go to the Wireless > Others screen and select 802.11b/g/n Mixed in the 802.11 Mode field. Click Apply. Thomas can now use the WPS feature to establish a wireless connection between his notebook and the ZyXEL Device (see Section 4.4.2 on page 46). He can also use the notebooks wireless client to search for the ZyXEL Device (see Section 4.4.3 on page 49). P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 45 Chapter 4 Tutorials 4.4.2 Using WPS This section shows you how to set up a wireless network using WPS. It uses the ZyXEL Device as the AP and ZyXEL NWD210N as the wireless client which connects to the notebook. Note: The wireless client must be a WPS-aware device (for example, a WPS USB adapter or PCMCIA card). There are two WPS methods to set up the wireless client settings:
Push Button Configuration (PBC) - simply press a button. This is the easier of the two methods. PIN Configuration - configure a Personal Identification Number (PIN) on the ZyXEL Device. A wireless client must also use the same PIN in order to download the wireless network settings from the ZyXEL Device. Push Button Configuration (PBC) 1 Make sure that your ZyXEL Device is turned on and your notebook is within the cover range of the wireless signal. 2 Make sure that you have installed the wireless client driver and utility in your notebook. 3 4 In the wireless client utility, go to the WPS setting page. Enable WPS and press the WPS button
(Start or WPS button). Push and hold the WPS button located on the ZyXEL Devices front panel for more than 5 seconds. Alternatively, you may log into ZyXEL Devices web configurator and go to the Network Settings
> Wireless > WPS screen. Enable the WPS function and click Apply. Then click the Connect button. 46 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials Note: Your ZyXEL Device has a WPS button located on its front panel as well as a WPS button in its configuration utility. Both buttons have exactly the same function: you can use one or the other. Note: It doesnt matter which button is pressed first. You must press the second button within two minutes of pressing the first one. The ZyXEL Device sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client. This may take up to two minutes. The wireless client is then able to communicate with the ZyXEL Device securely. The following figure shows you an example of how to set up a wireless network and its security by pressing a button on both ZyXEL Device and wireless client. Example WPS Process: PBC Method Wireless Client ZyXEL Device WITHIN 2 MINUTES WPS Press and hold for 5 seconds SECURITY INFO COMMUNICATION P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 47 Chapter 4 Tutorials PIN Configuration When you use the PIN configuration method, you need to use both the ZyXEL Devices web configurator and the wireless clients utility. 1 2 Launch your wireless clients configuration utility. Go to the WPS settings and select the PIN method to get a PIN number. Log into ZyXEL Devices web configurator and go to the Network Settings > Wireless > WPS screen. Enable the WPS function and click Apply. 3 Enter the PIN number of the wireless client and click the Register button. Activate WPS function on the wireless client utility screen within two minutes. The ZyXEL Device authenticates the wireless client and sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client. This may take up to two minutes. The wireless client is then able to communicate with the ZyXEL Device securely. 48 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide The following figure shows you how to set up a wireless network and its security on a ZyXEL Device and a wireless client by using PIN method. Example WPS Process: PIN Method Wireless Client ZyXEL Device Chapter 4 Tutorials WITHIN 2 MINUTES Authentication by PIN SECURITY INFO COMMUNICATION 4.4.3 Without WPS Use the wireless adapters utility installed on the notebook to search for the Example SSID. Then enter the DoNotStealMyWirelessNetwork pre-shared key to establish an wireless Internet connection. Note: The ZyXEL Device supports IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g wireless clients. Make sure that your notebook or computers wireless adapter supports one of these standards. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 49 Chapter 4 Tutorials 4.5 Setting Up Multiple Wireless Groups Company A wants to create different wireless network groups for different types of users as shown in the following figure. Each group has its own SSID and security mode. Company VIP Guest Employees in Company A will use a general Comapny wireless network group. Higher management level and important visitors will use the VIP group. Visiting guests will use the Guest group, which has a lower security mode. Company A will use the following parameters to set up the wireless network groups. SSID COMPANY Company Security Level More Secure Security Mode WPA2-PSK Pre-Shared Key ForCompanyOnly VIP VIP More Secure WPA2-PSK ForVIPOnly GUEST Guest Basic Static WEP Guest 50 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 1 Click Network Settings > Wireless to open the General screen. Use this screen to set up the companys general wireless network group. Configure the screen using the provided parameters and click Apply. Chapter 4 Tutorials 2 Click Network Settings > Wireless > More AP to open the following screen. Click the Edit icon to configure the second wireless network group. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 51 Chapter 4 Tutorials 3 Configure the screen using the provided parameters and click Apply. 4 In the More AP screen, click the Edit icon to configure the third wireless network group. 52 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 5 Configure the screen using the provided parameters and click Apply. Chapter 4 Tutorials 6 Check the status of VIP and Guest in the More AP screen. The yellow bulbs signify that the SSIDs are active and ready for wireless access. 4.6 Setting Up NAT Port Forwarding Thomas manages the Doom server on a computer behind the ZyXEL Device. In order for players on the Internet (like A in the figure below) to communicate with the Doom server, Thomas needs to P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 53 Chapter 4 Tutorials configure the port settings and IP address on the ZyXEL Device. Traffic should be forwarded to the port 666 of the Doom server computer which has an IP address of 192.168.1.34. Tutorial: NAT Port Forwarding Setup D=192.168.1.34 LAN port 666 WAN A Thomas may set up the port settings by configuring the port settings for the Doom server computer
(see Section 11.2 on page 160 for more information). 1 Click Network Settings > NAT > Add new rule and configure the screen with the following values:
Service Name WAN Interface Doom_Server Select the WAN interface through which the Doom service is forwarded. This example uses MyDSLConnection. External Port/s Enter 666 as the Start and End port. Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the Doom server. This is 192.168.1.34 for this example. Protocol Select TCP/UDP. This should be the protocol supported by the Doom server. 2 The screen should look as follows. Click Apply. 54 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 3 The port forwarding settings you configured appear in the table. The ZyXEL Device forwards port 666 traffic to the computer with IP address 192.168.1.34. Chapter 4 Tutorials Players on the Internet then can have access to Thomas Doom server. 4.7 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network In order to extend your Intranet and control traffic flowing directions, you may connect a router to the ZyXEL Devices LAN. The router may be used to separate two department networks. This tutorial shows how to configure a static routing rule for two network routings. In the following figure, router R is connected to the ZyXEL Devices LAN. R connects to two networks, N1 (192.168.1.x/24) and N2 (192.168.10.x/24). If you want to send traffic from computer A (in N1 network) to computer B (in N2 network), the traffic is sent to the ZyXEL Devices WAN default gateway by default. In this case, B will never receive the traffic. N1 A R N2 B P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 55 Chapter 4 Tutorials You need to specify a static routing rule on the ZyXEL Device to specify R as the router in charge of forwarding traffic to N2. In this case, the ZyXEL Device routes traffic from A to R and then R routes the traffic to B. N1 A R N2 B This tutorial uses the following example IP settings:
Table 4 IP Settings in this Tutorial DEVICE / COMPUTER The ZyXEL Devices WAN IP ADDRESS 172.16.1.1 The ZyXEL Devices LAN A Rs N1 Rs N2 B 192.168.1.1 192.168.1.34 192.168.1.253 192.168.10.2 192.168.10.33 To configure a static route to route traffic from N1 to N2:
Log into the ZyXEL Devices Web Configurator in advanced mode. Click Advanced > Routing. Click Add New Static Route Entry in the Static Route screen. Configure the Static Route Setup screen using the following settings:
1 2 3 4 4a 4b 56 Select the Active check box. Enter the Route Name as R. Type 192.168.10.0 and subnet mask 255.255.255.0 for the destination, N2. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 4c 4d Select the interface that is in use. Select Enable in the Use Gateway IP Address field. Type 192.168.1.253 (Rs N1 address) in the Gateway IP Address field. Chapter 4 Tutorials 4a Click Apply. Now B should be able to receive traffic from A. You may need to additionally configure Bs firewall settings to allow specific traffic to pass through. 4.8 Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup This section contains tutorials on how you can configure the QoS screen. Lets say you are a team leader of a small sales branch office. You want to prioritize e-mail traffic because your task includes sending urgent updates to clients at least twice every hour. You also upload data files (such as logs and e-mail archives) to the FTP server throughout the day. Your colleagues use the Internet for research, as well as chat applications for communicating with other branch offices. In the following figure, your Internet connection has an upstream transmission bandwidth of 10,000 kbps. For this example, you want to configure QoS so that e-mail traffic gets the highest priority with at least 5,000 kbps. You can do the following:
Configure a queue to assign the highest priority queue (1) to e-mail traffic going to the WAN interface, so that e-mail traffic would not get delayed when there is network congestion. Note the IP address (192.168.1.23 for example) and/or MAC address (AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF for example) of your computer and map it to queue 7. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 57 Chapter 4 Tutorials Note: QoS is applied to traffic flowing out of the ZyXEL Device. Traffic that does not match this class is assigned a priority queue based on the internal QoS mapping table on the ZyXEL Device. QoS Example DSL 10,000 kbps Your computer IP=192.168.1.23 and/or MAC=AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF E-mail traffic: Highest priority A colleagues computer Other traffic: Automatic classifier 1 Click Network Settings > QoS > General and select Active. Set your WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth to 10,000 kbps (or leave this blank to have the ZyXEL Device automatically determine this figure). Click Apply. Tutorial: Advanced > QoS 2 Click Queue Setup > Add new Queue to create a new queue. In the screen that opens, check Active and enter or select the following values:
Name: E-mail To Interface: WAN Priority: 1 (High) Weight: 8 58 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Rate Limit: 5,000 (kbps) Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Queue Setup Chapter 4 Tutorials 3 Click Class Setup > Add new Classifier to create a new class. Check Active and follow the settings as shown in the screen below. Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Class Setup P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 59 Chapter 4 Tutorials Class Name Give a class name to this traffic, such as E-mail in this example. From Interface This is the interface from which the traffic will be coming from. Select LAN1 for this example. Ether Type IP Address MAC Address Select IP to identify the traffic source by its IP address or MAC address. Type the IP address of your computer - 192.168.1.23. Type the IP Subnet Mask if you know it. Type the MAC address of your computer - AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF. Type the MAC Mask if you know it. To Queue Index Link this to an item in the Network Settings > QoS > Queue Setup screen, which is the E-mail queue created in this example. This maps e-mail traffic coming from port 25 to the highest priority, which you have created in the previous screen (see the IP Protocol field). This also maps your computers IP address and MAC address to the E-mail queue (see the Source fields). 4 Verify that the queue setup works by checking Network Settings > QoS > Monitor. This shows the bandwidth allotted to e-mail traffic compared to other network traffic. 4.9 Access the ZyXEL Device Using DDNS If you connect your ZyXEL Device to the Internet and it uses a dynamic WAN IP address, it is inconvenient for you to manage the device from the Internet. The ZyXEL Devices WAN IP address changes dynamically. Dynamic DNS (DDNS) allows you to access the ZyXEL Device using a domain name. http://zyxelrouter.dyndns.org A a.b.c.d w.x.y.z To use this feature, you have to apply for DDNS service at www.dyndns.org. This tutorial covers:
Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org Configuring DDNS on Your ZyXEL Device Testing the DDNS Setting Note: If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use DDNS. 60 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials 4.9.1 Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org 1 Open a browser and type http://www.dyndns.org. 2 3 4 Apply for a user account. This tutorial uses UserName1 and 12345 as the username and password. Log into www.dyndns.org using your account. Add a new DDNS host name. This tutorial uses the following settings as an example. Hostname: zyxelrouter.dyndns.org Service Type: Host with IP address IP Address: Enter the WAN IP address that your ZyXEL Device is currently using. You can find the IP address on the ZyXEL Devices Web Configurator Status page. Then you will need to configure the same account and host name on the ZyXEL Device later. 4.9.2 Configuring DDNS on Your ZyXEL Device Configure the following settings in the Advanced > DNS Setting > Dynamic DNS screen. Select Enable Dynamic DNS. Select DynDNS.org as the service provider. Type zyxelrouter.dyndns.org in the Host Name field. Enter the user name (UserName1) and password (12345). Click Apply. 4.9.3 Testing the DDNS Setting Now you should be able to access the ZyXEL Device from the Internet. To test this:
1 Open a web browser on the computer (using the IP address a.b.c.d) that is connected to the Internet. 2 3 Type http://zyxelrouter.dyndns.org and press [Enter]. The ZyXEL Devices login page should appear. You can then log into the ZyXEL Device and manage it. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 61 Chapter 4 Tutorials 62 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide PART II Technical Reference 63 64 CHAPTER 5 Network Map and Status Screens 5.1 Overview After you log into the Web Configurator, the Network Map screen appears. This shows the network connection status of the ZyXEL Device and clients connected to it. You can use the Status screen to look at the current status of the ZyXEL Device, system resources, and interfaces (LAN, WAN, and WLAN). 5.2 The Network Map Screen Use this screen to view the network connection status of the device and its clients. A warning message appears if there is a connection problem. If you prefer to view the status in a list, click List View in the Viewing Mode selection box. You can configure how often you want the ZyXEL Device to update this screen in Refresh Interval. Figure 12 Network Map: Icon Mode P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 65 Chapter 5 Network Map and Status Screens Figure 13 Network Map: List Mode In Icon Mode, if you want to view information about a client, click the clients name and Info. Click the IP address if you want to change it. If you want to change the name or icon of the client, click Change name/icon. Figure 14 Icon Mode: Change name/icon In List Mode, you can also view the clients information and click on the IP address if you want to change it. 66 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 5 Network Map and Status Screens 5.3 The Status Screen Use this screen to view the status of the ZyXEL Device. Click Status to open this screen. Figure 15 Status Screen Each field is described in the following table. Table 5 Status Screen LABEL Refresh Interval DESCRIPTION Select how often you want the ZyXEL Device to update this screen. Device Information Host Name This field displays the ZyXEL Device system name. It is used for identification. Model Number This shows the model number of your ZyXEL Device. Firmware Version This is the current version of the firmware inside the device. WAN Information (These fields display when you have a WAN connection.) MAC Address This shows the WAN Ethernet adapter MAC (Media Access Control) Address of your device. This field is available only when your WAN type is IPoE or PPPoE. IP Address This field displays the current IP address of the ZyXEL Device in the WAN. IP Subnet Mask This field displays the current subnet mask in the WAN. This field is available only when your WAN type is IPoE or IPoA. WAN Type This field displays the current WAN connection type. LAN Information MAC Address This shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC (Media Access Control) Address of your device. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 67 Chapter 5 Network Map and Status Screens Table 5 Status Screen (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the current IP address of the ZyXEL Device in the LAN. IP Address IP Subnet Mask DHCP This is the current subnet mask in the LAN. This field displays what DHCP services the ZyXEL Device is providing to the LAN. Choices are:
Server - The ZyXEL Device is a DHCP server in the LAN. It assigns IP addresses to other computers in the LAN. Relay - The ZyXEL Device acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP requests and responses between the remote server and the clients. None - The ZyXEL Device is not providing any DHCP services to the LAN. WLAN Information MAC Address This shows the wireless adapter MAC (Media Access Control) Address of your device. Status This displays whether WLAN is activated. Name (SSID) This is the descriptive name used to identify the ZyXEL Device in a wireless LAN. Channel This is the channel number used by the ZyXEL Device now. Security Mode This displays the type of security mode the ZyXEL Device is using in the wireless LAN. 802.11 Mode This displays the type of 802.11 mode the ZyXEL Device is using in the wireless LAN. WPS This displays whether WPS is activated. Interface Status Interface Status This column displays each interface the ZyXEL Device has. This field indicates whether or not the ZyXEL Device is using the interface. For the LAN interfaces, the Ethernet WAN interface, or the HPNA interface, this field displays Up when the ZyXEL Device is using the interface and NoLink when the line is disconnected. For the WLAN interface, it displays Active when WLAN is enabled or InActive when WLAN is disabled. For the DSL interface, this field displays NoLink (line is down), Up (line is up or connected) if you're using Ethernet encapsulation and NoLink (line is down), Up
(line is up or connected), Idle (line (ppp) idle), Dial (starting to trigger a call) and Drop (dropping a call) if you're using PPPoE encapsulation. Rate For the LAN interface, this displays the port speed and duplex setting. For the DSL interface, it displays the downstream and upstream transmission rate. For the WLAN interface, it displays the maximum transmission rate when WLAN is enabled or N/A when WLAN is disabled. System Status System Up Time This field displays how long the ZyXEL Device has been running since it last started up. The ZyXEL Device starts up when you plug it in, when you restart it
(Maintenance > Reboot), or when you reset it. Current Date/
Time This field displays the current date and time in the ZyXEL Device. You can change this in Maintenance> Time Setting. System Resource 68 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 5 Network Map and Status Screens Table 5 Status Screen (continued) LABEL CPU Usage Memory Usage DESCRIPTION This field displays what percentage of the ZyXEL Devices processing ability is currently used. When this percentage is close to 100%, the ZyXEL Device is running at full load, and the throughput is not going to improve anymore. If you want some applications to have more throughput, you should turn off other applications (for example, using QoS; see Chapter 10 on page 139). This field displays what percentage of the ZyXEL Devices memory is currently used. Usually, this percentage should not increase much. If memory usage does get close to 100%, the ZyXEL Device is probably becoming unstable, and you should restart the device. See Section 31.2 on page 259, or turn off the device
(unplug the power) for a few seconds. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 69 Chapter 5 Network Map and Status Screens 70 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide CHAPTER 6 Broadband 6.1 Overview This chapter describes how to configure WAN settings from the Broadband screen. Use this screen to configure your ZyXEL Device for Internet access. If the DSLAM of your ISP supports DSL bonding, you can connect the two DSL ports on the ZyXEL Device to two separate telephone jacks and enable the bonding feature in the DSL screen. The bonding feature provides increased throughput at longer distances. A WAN (Wide Area Network) connection is an outside connection to another network or the Internet. It connects your private networks (such as a LAN (Local Area Network) and other networks, so that a computer in one location can communicate with computers in other locations. Figure 16 LAN and WAN LAN WAN 6.1.1 What You Need to Know Encapsulation Method Encapsulation is used to include data from an upper layer protocol into a lower layer protocol. To set up a WAN connection to the Internet, you need to use the same encapsulation method used by your ISP (Internet Service Provider). If your ISP offers a dial-up Internet connection using PPPoE (PPP over Ethernet) or PPPoA, they should also provide a username and password (and service name) for user authentication. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 71 Chapter 6 Broadband WAN IP Address The WAN IP address is an IP address for the ZyXEL Device, which makes it accessible from an outside network. It is used by the ZyXEL Device to communicate with other devices in other networks. It can be static (fixed) or dynamically assigned by the ISP each time the ZyXEL Device tries to access the Internet. If your ISP assigns you a static WAN IP address, they should also assign you the subnet mask and DNS server IP address(es) (and a gateway IP address if you use the Ethernet encapsulation method). ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) is a LAN and WAN networking technology that provides high-
speed data transfer. ATM uses fixed-size packets of information called cells. With ATM, a high QoS
(Quality of Service) can be guaranteed. ATM uses a connection-oriented model and establishes a virtual circuit (VC) between two endpoints before the actual data exchange begins. PTM Packet Transfer Mode (PTM) is packet-oriented and supported by the VDSL2 standard. In PTM, packets are encapsulated directly in the High-level Data Link Control (HDLC) frames. It is designed to provide a low-overhead, transparent way of transporting packets over DSL links, as an alternative to ATM. Multicast Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network - not everybody and not just one. IGMP IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. There are three versions of IGMP. IGMP version 2 and 3 are improvements over version 1, but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use. Finding Out More See Section 6.4 on page 82 for technical background information on WAN. 6.1.2 Before You Begin You need to know your Internet access settings such as encapsulation and WAN IP address. Get this information from your ISP. 72 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 6 Broadband 6.2 The Broadband Screen Use this screen to change your ZyXEL Devices Internet access settings. Click Network Settings>
Broadband from the menu. The summary table shows you the configured WAN services
(connections) on the ZyXEL Device. Figure 17 Network Settings > Broadband The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 6 Network Settings > Broadband LABEL PTM over ADSL DESCRIPTION Select Enable to use PTM over ADSL. Since PTM has less overhead than ATM, some ISPs use PTM over ADSL for better performance. Add new WAN interface
Status Name Type Click this button to create a new connection. This is the index number of the entry. This is the status of the connection. This is the service name of the connection. This shows whether it is a VDSL, ADSL, or Ethernet connection. Encapsulation This is the method of encapsulation used by this connection. VLAN VPI/VCI ATM QoS IGMP Proxy NAT This is the Virtual LAN (VLAN) number configured for this WAN connection. This is the Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) and Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI) numbers configured for this WAN connection. This is the type of ATM QoS of the connection. This shows whether the ZyXEL Device act as an IGMP proxy on this connection. This shows whether NAT is activated or not for this connection. Default Gateway This shows whether the ZyXEL Device use the WAN interface of this connection as the system default gateway. Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the WAN connection. Click the Delete icon to remove the WAN connection. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 73 Chapter 6 Broadband 6.2.1 Add/Edit Broadband Click Add new WAN interface in the Broadband screen or the Edit icon next to an existing WAN interface to configure a WAN connection. The screen differs according to the mode and encapsulation you choose. This screen displays when you select Routing mode and PPPoE encapsulation. Figure 18 Broadband: Add/Edit: PPPoE Encapsulation 74 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 6 Broadband The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 7 Broadband: Add/Edit: PPPoE Encapsulation LABEL General DESCRIPTION Active Name Type Select this to activate the WAN configuration settings. Specify a descriptive name for this connection. This field is view only if you are editing the WAN connection. Select whether it is ADSL/VDSL over PTM, ADSL over ATM, or Ethernet connection. ADSL/VDSL over PTM: The ZyXEL Device uses the VDSL technology for data transmission over the DSL port. ADSL over ATM: The ZyXEL Device uses the ADSL technology for data transmission over the DSL port. Ethernet: The ZyXEL Device transmits data over the Ethernet WAN port. Select this if you have a DSL router or modem in your network already. Mode Select Routing (default) from the drop-down list box if your ISP give you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to share an Internet account. Encapsulation Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP from the drop-down list box. This option is available only when you select Routing in the Mode field. PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE): PPPoE (Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet) provides access control and billing functionality in a manner similar to dial-
up services using PPP. Select this if you have a username and password for Internet access. IP over Ethernet (IPoE): In this type of Internet connection, IP packets are routed between the Ethernet interface and the WAN interface and then formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged environment. PPP over ATM (PPPoA): PPPoA allows just one PPPoA connection over a PVC. IP over ATM (IPoA): IPoA allows just one RFC 1483 routing connection over a PVC. If your connection type is ADSL/VDSL over PTM or Ethernet, the choices are PPPoE and IPoE. If your connection type is ADSL over ATM, the choices are PPPoE, PPPoA, IPoE and IPoA. ATM PVC Configuration (These fields appear when the Type is set to ADSL over ATM.) VPI VCI The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you. The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you. DSL Link Type This field is not editable. The selection depends on the setting in the Encapsulation field. EoA (Ethernet over ATM) uses an Ethernet header in the packet, so that you can have multiple services/connections over one PVC. You can set each connection to have its own MAC address or all connections share one MAC address but use different VLAN IDs for different services. EoA supports ENET ENCAP (IPoE), PPPoE and RFC1483/2684 bridging encapsulation methods. PPPoA (PPP over ATM) allows just one PPPoA connection over a PVC. IPoA (IP over ATM) allows just one RFC 1483 routing connection over a PVC. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 75 Chapter 6 Broadband Table 7 Broadband: Add/Edit: PPPoE Encapsulation (continued) LABEL Encapsulation Mode DESCRIPTION Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop-down list box. Choices are:
LLC/SNAP-BRIDGING: In LCC encapsulation, bridged PDUs are encapsulated by identifying the type of the bridged media in the SNAP header. This is available only when you select IPoE or PPPoE in the Select DSL Link Type field. VC/MUX: In VC multiplexing, each protocol is carried on a single ATM virtual circuit (VC). To transport multiple protocols, the ZyXEL Device needs separate VCs. There is a binding between a VC and the type of the network protocol carried on the VC. This reduces payload overhead since there is no need to carry protocol information in each Protocol Data Unit (PDU) payload. LLC/ENCAPSULATION: More than one protocol can be carried over the same VC. This is available only when you select PPPoA in the Encapsulation field. LLC/SNAP-ROUTING: In LCC encapsulation, an IEEE 802.2 Logical Link Control (LLC) header is prefixed to each routed PDU to identify the PDUs. The LCC header can be followed by an IEEE 802.1a SubNetwork Attachment Point (SNAP) header. This is available only when you select IPoA in the Encapsulation field. Service Category Select UBR Without PCR or UBR With PCR for applications that are non-time sensitive, such as e-mail. Select CBR (Continuous Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth for voice or data traffic. Select Non Realtime VBR (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) for connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation. Select Realtime VBR (real-time Variable Bit Rate) for applications with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation. Divide the DSL line rate (bps) by 424 (the size of an ATM cell) to find the Peak Cell Rate (PCR). This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. Type the PCR here. This field is not available when you select UBR Without PCR. Peak Cell Rate Sustain Cell Rate The Sustain Cell Rate (SCR) sets the average cell rate (long-term) that can be transmitted. Type the SCR, which must be less than the PCR. Note that system default is 0 cells/sec. This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime VBR. Maximum Burst Size Maximum Burst Size (MBS) refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the peak rate. Type the MBS, which is less than 65535. This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime VBR. PPP Information This is available only when you select PPPoE or PPPoA in the Mode field. PPP User Name Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned. If assigned a name in the form user@domain where domain identifies a service name, then enter both components exactly as given. PPP Password Enter the password associated with the user name above. PPP Auto Connect Select this option if you do not want the connection to time out. Idle Timeout This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the router automatically disconnects from the PPPoE server. PPPoE Service Name This field is not configurable if you select PPP Auto Connect. Enter the name of your PPPoE service here. 76 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 6 Broadband Table 7 Broadband: Add/Edit: PPPoE Encapsulation (continued) LABEL PPPoE Passthrough DESCRIPTION This field is available when you select PPPoE encapsulation. In addition to the ZyXEL Devices built-in PPPoE client, you can enable PPPoE pass through to allow up to ten hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP via the ZyXEL Device. Each host can have a separate account and a public WAN IP address. PPPoE pass through is an alternative to NAT for application where NAT is not appropriate. Disable PPPoE pass through if you do not need to allow hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP. IP Address Obtain an IP Address Automatically A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet. Select this if you have a dynamic IP address. Static IP Address Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address. IP Address IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Routing Feature NAT Enable IGMP Proxy Enable Enter the static IP address provided by your ISP. Enter the subnet mask provided by your ISP. Enter the gateway IP address provided by your ISP. Select this option to activate NAT on this connection. Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. Select this option to have the ZyXEL Device act as an IGMP proxy on this connection. This allows the ZyXEL Device to get subscribing information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast group. It can reduce multicast traffic significantly. Apply as Default Gateway Select this option to have the ZyXEL Device use the WAN interface of this connection as the system default gateway. DNS Server DNS This is available only when you select Apply as Default Gateway in the Routing Feature field. Select Dynamic if you want the ZyXEL Device use the DNS server addresses assigned by your ISP. Select Static if you want the ZyXEL Device use the DNS server addresses you configure manually. DNS Server 1 Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP. DNS Server 2 Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP. VLAN (These fields appear when the Type is set to ADSL/VDSL over PTM or Ethernet.) Active 802.1p 802.1q QoS Select this option to add the VLAN tag (specified below) to the outgoing traffic through this connection. IEEE 802.1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC-
layer frame that contains bits to define class of service. Select the IEEE 802.1p priority level to add to traffic through this connection. The greater the number, the higher the priority level. Type the VLAN ID number for traffic through this connection. If you want to set a rate limit for the connection, enter it in the Rate Limit field. This is the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this connection. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 77 Chapter 6 Broadband Table 7 Broadband: Add/Edit: PPPoE Encapsulation (continued) LABEL Apply DESCRIPTION Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 6.2.1.1 Bridge This screen displays when you select the Bridge mode. Figure 19 Broadband: Add/Edit: Bridge Mode The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 8 Broadband: Add/Edit: Bridge Mode LABEL General DESCRIPTION Active Name Type Mode Select this to activate the WAN configuration settings. Specify a descriptive name for this connection. Select whether it is ADSL/VDSL over PTM, ADSL over ATM, or Ethernet connection. ADSL/VDSL over PTM: The ZyXEL Device uses the VDSL technology for data transmission over the DSL port. ADSL over ATM: The ZyXEL Device uses the ADSL technology for data transmission over the DSL port. Ethernet: The ZyXEL Device transmits data over the Ethernet WAN port. Select this if you have a DSL router or modem in your network already. Select Bridge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you want the connected computers to get individual IP address from ISPs DHCP server directly. If you select Bridge, you cannot use routing functions, such as Firewall, DHCP server and NAT on traffic from the selected LAN port(s). ATM PVC Configuration VPI The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you. 78 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 6 Broadband Table 8 Broadband: Add/Edit: Bridge Mode (continued) LABEL VCI DESCRIPTION The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you. DSL Link Type This field is not editable. EoA (Ethernet over ATM) uses an Ethernet header in the packet, so that you can have multiple services/connections over one PVC. You can set each connection to have its own MAC address or all connections share one MAC address but use different VLAN IDs for different services. Encapsulation Mode Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop-down list box. Choices are:
LLC/SNAP-BRIDGING: In LCC encapsulation, bridged PDUs are encapsulated by identifying the type of the bridged media in the SNAP header. VC/MUX: In VC multiplexing, each protocol is carried on a single ATM virtual circuit (VC). To transport multiple protocols, the ZyXEL Device needs separate VCs. There is a binding between a VC and the type of the network protocol carried on the VC. This reduces payload overhead since there is no need to carry protocol information in each Protocol Data Unit (PDU) payload. Service Category Select UBR Without PCR or UBR With PCR for applications that are non-time sensitive, such as e-mail. Select CBR (Continuous Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth for voice or data traffic. Select Non Realtime VBR (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) for connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation. Select Realtime VBR (real-time Variable Bit Rate) for applications with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation. Divide the DSL line rate (bps) by 424 (the size of an ATM cell) to find the Peak Cell Rate (PCR). This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. Type the PCR here. This field is not available when you select UBR Without PCR. Peak Cell Rate Sustain Cell Rate The Sustain Cell Rate (SCR) sets the average cell rate (long-term) that can be transmitted. Type the SCR, which must be less than the PCR. Note that system default is 0 cells/sec. This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime VBR. Maximum Burst Size Maximum Burst Size (MBS) refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the peak rate. Type the MBS, which is less than 65535. This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime VBR. VLAN (These fields appear when the Type is set to ADSL/VDSL over PTM or Ethernet) Active 802.1p 802.1q QoS Apply Cancel Select this option to add the VLAN tag (specified below) to the outgoing traffic through this connection. IEEE 802.1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC-
layer frame that contains bits to define class of service. Select the IEEE 802.1p priority level (from 0 to 7) to add to traffic through this connection. The greater the number, the higher the priority level. Type the VLAN ID number (from 1 to 4094) for traffic through this connection. If you want to set a rate limit for the connection, enter it in the Rate Limit field. This is the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this connection. Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 79 Chapter 6 Broadband 6.3 The DSL Screen If the DSLAM of your ISP supports DSL bonding, you can connect the two DSL ports on the ZyXEL Device to two separate telephone jacks and enable the bonding feature in the DSL screen. DSL signals have distance limitations. VDSL2 (profile 17a) supports greater speed but offer shorter distances (within 3000 ft). The farther away the subscribers are from the DSLAM, the slower the speed. VDSL (profile 12a) provides longer distance range (over 3000 ft) but at lower speeds. DSL bonding allows subscribers to use data streams spread over two DSL lines in order to (almost) double the speed at longer distances. You may choose to use DSL bonding if the DSLAM supports it and there are two DSL lines to the DSLAM. The total available bandwidth for the subscriber then becomes the sum of the bandwidth available for each of the subscribers line connections. The data rate depends on the DSL type, its standard/
profile, and the standard/profile that the DSLAM supports. The table below shows the transmission data rate for single DSL line and DSL bonding. Table 9 Comparison Table for Single DSL line and DSL Bonding ITEM VDSL2 VDSL BONDING ADSL2+
PROFILE/
STANDARD G993.2 Profile 17a G993.2 Profile 12a G.992.5 ADSL(2+) BONDING G.992.5 MAX. DOWNSTREAM/
UPSTREAM DISTANCE 100/60 Mbps 50/25 x 2 = 100/50 Mbps 25/1 Mbps 25/1 x 2 = 50/2 Mbps within 3000 ft over 3000 ft over 5000 ft 5000 to 7000 ft For a single VDSL line, the profile is 17a, which provides a maximum data rate of 100/60 Mbps
(downstream/upstream). If VDSL bonding is used, the supported profile is 12a, which provides a maximum data rate of 50/25 Mbps for each VDSL line. The ideal total data rate for the bonded connection is 100/50 Mbps. For a single ADSL line, the standard with the highest data rate supported is ADSL2+, which provides 25/1 Mbps data rate. When ADSL bonding is used, the data rate doubles to 50/2 Mbps. In addition, DSL bonding supports ADSL bonding fallback. If a VDSL connection cannot be established, the ZyXEL Device tries to use ADSL. If the VDSL connection is re-established, the ZyXEL Device automatically switches back to VDSL. You must enable DSL bonding in order to use ADSL fallback. 80 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Click Broadband > DSL to display the following screen. Figure 20 Broadband > DSL Chapter 6 Broadband The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 10 Broadband > DSL LABEL DSL Bonding DESCRIPTION State Multi-PHY Current Mode Apply Cancel Select Enable to use the DSL bonding and ADSL fallback features. Make sure your ISP supports these functions. This shows the current bonding mode the ZyXEL Device is using. You can change it in the Mode field. Select whether you want to use Auto Switch, VDSL Bonding, or ADSL Bonding. If you select Auto Switch, the ZyXEL Device automatically switches to ADSL bonding when the VDSL bonding is not available. The bonding switches back to VSDL when it is re-established. Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 81 Chapter 6 Broadband 6.4 Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter. 6.4.1 Encapsulation Be sure to use the encapsulation method required by your ISP. The ZyXEL Device supports the following methods. 6.4.1.1 PPP over Ethernet The ZyXEL Device supports PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet). PPPoE is an IETF Draft standard (RFC 2516) specifying how a personal computer (PC) interacts with a broadband modem
(DSL, cable, wireless, etc.) connection. The PPPoE option is for a dial-up connection using PPPoE. For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems (for example RADIUS). One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services, a function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals. Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier, as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site. By implementing PPPoE directly on the ZyXEL Device (rather than individual computers), the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since the ZyXEL Device does that part of the task. Furthermore, with NAT, all of the LANs computers will have access. 6.4.1.2 PPPoA PPPoA stands for Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL5). A PPPoA connection functions like a dial-up Internet connection. The ZyXEL Device encapsulates the PPP session based on RFC1483 and sends it through an ATM PVC (Permanent Virtual Circuit) to the Internet Service Providers (ISP) DSLAM (Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Access Multiplexer). Please refer to RFC 2364 for more information on PPPoA. Refer to RFC 1661 for more information on PPP. 82 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 6 Broadband 6.4.2 Multiplexing There are two conventions to identify what protocols the virtual circuit (VC) is carrying. Be sure to use the multiplexing method required by your ISP. VC-based Multiplexing In this case, by prior mutual agreement, each protocol is assigned to a specific virtual circuit; for example, VC1 carries IP, etc. VC-based multiplexing may be dominant in environments where dynamic creation of large numbers of ATM VCs is fast and economical. LLC-based Multiplexing In this case one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained in each packet header. Despite the extra bandwidth and processing overhead, this method may be advantageous if it is not practical to have a separate VC for each carried protocol, for example, if charging heavily depends on the number of simultaneous VCs. 6.4.3 VPI and VCI Be sure to use the correct Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) and Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI) numbers assigned to you. The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255 and for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic). Please see the appendix for more information. 6.4.4 IP Address Assignment A static IP is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time. The Single User Account feature can be enabled or disabled if you have either a dynamic or static IP. IP Assignment with PPPoA or PPPoE Encapsulation If you have a dynamic IP, then the IP Address and Gateway IP Address fields are not applicable
(N/A). If you have a static IP, then you only need to fill in the IP Address field and not the Gateway IP Address field. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 83 Chapter 6 Broadband 6.4.5 NAT NAT (Network Address Translation - NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet, for example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network to a different IP address known within another network. 6.4.6 Traffic Shaping Traffic Shaping is an agreement between the carrier and the subscriber to regulate the average rate and fluctuations of data transmission over an ATM network. This agreement helps eliminate congestion, which is important for transmission of real time data such as audio and video connections. Peak Cell Rate (PCR) is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. This parameter may be lower (but not higher) than the maximum line speed. 1 ATM cell is 53 bytes (424 bits), so a maximum speed of 832Kbps gives a maximum PCR of 1962 cells/sec. This rate is not guaranteed because it is dependent on the line speed. Sustained Cell Rate (SCR) is the mean cell rate of each bursty traffic source. It specifies the maximum average rate at which cells can be sent over the virtual connection. SCR may not be greater than the PCR. Maximum Burst Size (MBS) is the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the PCR. After MBS is reached, cell rates fall below SCR until cell rate averages to the SCR again. At this time, more cells (up to the MBS) can be sent at the PCR again. If the PCR, SCR or MBS is set to the default of "0", the system will assign a maximum value that correlates to your upstream line rate. The following figure illustrates the relationship between PCR, SCR and MBS. Figure 21 Example of Traffic Shaping 6.4.7 ATM Traffic Classes These are the basic ATM traffic classes defined by the ATM Forum Traffic Management 4.0 Specification. 84 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 6 Broadband Constant Bit Rate (CBR) Constant Bit Rate (CBR) provides fixed bandwidth that is always available even if no data is being sent. CBR traffic is generally time-sensitive (doesn't tolerate delay). CBR is used for connections that continuously require a specific amount of bandwidth. A PCR is specified and if traffic exceeds this rate, cells may be dropped. Examples of connections that need CBR would be high-resolution video and voice. Variable Bit Rate (VBR) The Variable Bit Rate (VBR) ATM traffic class is used with bursty connections. Connections that use the Variable Bit Rate (VBR) traffic class can be grouped into real time (VBR-RT) or non-real time
(VBR-nRT) connections. The VBR-RT (real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation. It also provides a fixed amount of bandwidth (a PCR is specified) but is only available when data is being sent. An example of an VBR-RT connection would be video conferencing. Video conferencing requires real-time data transfers and the bandwidth requirement varies in proportion to the video image's changing dynamics. The VBR-nRT (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation. It is commonly used for "bursty" traffic typical on LANs. PCR and MBS define the burst levels, SCR defines the minimum level. An example of an VBR-nRT connection would be non-time sensitive data file transfers. Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) The Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) ATM traffic class is for bursty data transfers. However, UBR doesn't guarantee any bandwidth and only delivers traffic when the network has spare bandwidth. An example application is background file transfer. 6.4.8 Introduction to VLANs A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks. Devices on a logical network belong to one group. A device can belong to more than one group. With VLAN, a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group(s); the traffic must first go through a router. In Multi-Tenant Unit (MTU) applications, VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the subscribers. When properly configured, VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network resources of another on the same LAN, thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user in the same building. VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain. In traditional switched environments, all broadcast packets go to each and every individual port. With VLAN, all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain. Introduction to IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag (VLAN ID) in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges - they are not confined to the switch on which they were created. The P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 85 Chapter 6 Broadband VLANs can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP. The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame across the network. A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two bytes of TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier), residing within the type/length field of the Ethernet frame) and two bytes of TCI (Tag Control Information), starts after the source address field of the Ethernet frame). The CFI (Canonical Format Indicator) is a single-bit flag, always set to zero for Ethernet switches. If a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1, then that frame should not be forwarded as it is to an untagged port. The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID, giving a possible maximum number of 4,096 VLANs. Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other. A frame with VID (VLAN Identifier) of null (0) is called a priority frame, meaning that only the priority level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame. Of the 4096 possible VIDs, a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and value 4095 (FFF) is reserved, so the maximum possible VLAN configurations are 4,094. TPID User Priority CFI VLAN ID 2 Bytes 3 Bits 1 Bit 12 Bits 86 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide CHAPTER 7 Wireless 7.1 Overview This chapter describes the ZyXEL Devices Network Settings > Wireless screens. Use these screens to set up your ZyXEL Devices wireless connection. 7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter This section describes the ZyXEL Devices Wireless screens. Use these screens to set up your ZyXEL Devices wireless connection. Use the General screen to enable the Wireless LAN, enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode (Section 7.2 on page 88). Use the More AP screen to set up multiple wireless networks on your ZyXEL Device (Section 7.3 on page 95). Use the MAC Authentication screen to allow or deny wireless clients based on their MAC addresses from connecting to the ZyXEL Device (Section 7.4 on page 97). Use the WPS screen to enable or disable WPS, view or generate a security PIN (Personal Identification Number) (Section 7.5 on page 98). Use the Others screen to configure wireless advanced features, such as the RTS/CTS Threshold
(Section 7.6 on page 100). P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 87 Chapter 7 Wireless 7.1.2 What You Need to Know Wireless Basics Wireless is essentially radio communication. In the same way that walkie-talkie radios send and receive information over the airwaves, wireless networking devices exchange information with one another. A wireless networking device is just like a radio that lets your computer exchange information with radios attached to other computers. Like walkie-talkies, most wireless networking devices operate at radio frequency bands that are open to the public and do not require a license to use. However, wireless networking is different from that of most traditional radio communications in that there a number of wireless networking standards available with different methods of data encryption. Finding Out More See Section 7.7 on page 101 for advanced technical information on wireless networks. 7.2 The General Screen Use this screen to enable the Wireless LAN, enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode. Note: If you are configuring the ZyXEL Device from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the ZyXEL Devices SSID, channel or security settings, you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm. You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the ZyXEL Devices new settings. 88 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Click Network Settings > Wireless to open the General screen. Figure 22 Network Settings > Wireless > General Chapter 7 Wireless The following table describes the general wireless LAN labels in this screen. Table 11 Network Settings > Wireless > General LABEL Wireless Network Setup DESCRIPTION Wireless Channel You can Enable or Disable the wireless LAN in this field. Set the channel depending on your particular region. Select a channel or use Auto to have the ZyXEL Device automatically determine a channel to use. If you are having problems with wireless interference, changing the channel may help. Try to use a channel that is as many channels away from any channels used by neighboring APs as possible. The channel number which the ZyXEL Device is currently using then displays next to this field. more.../less Click more... to show more information. Click less to hide them. Bandwidth Select whether the ZyXEL Device uses a wireless channel width of 20MHz or 20MHz/40MHz. A standard 20MHz channel offers transfer speeds of up to 150Mbps whereas a 40MHz channel uses two standard channels and offers speeds of up to 300 Mbps. 40MHz (channel bonding or dual channel) bonds two adjacent radio channels to increase throughput. The wireless clients must also support 40 MHz. It is often better to use the 20 MHz setting in a location where the environment hinders the wireless signal. Select 20MHz if you want to lessen radio interference with other wireless devices in your neighborhood or the wireless clients do not support channel bonding. Select 20MHz/40MHz to allow the ZyXEL Device to adjust the channel bandwidth depending on network conditions. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 89 Chapter 7 Wireless Table 11 Network Settings > Wireless > General (continued) LABEL Wireless Network Settings DESCRIPTION Wireless Network Name
(SSID) The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless device is associated. Wireless devices associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 English keyboard characters) for the wireless LAN. Hide SSID Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool. Client Isolation Select this to keep the wireless clients in this SSID from communicating with each other through the ZyXEL Device. MBSSID/LAN Isolation Select this to keep the wireless clients in this SSID from communicating with clients in other SSIDs or wired LAN devices through the ZyXEL Device. Enhanced Multicast Forwarding Security Level Security Mode Select both Client Isolation and MBSSID/LAN Isolation to allow this SSIDs wireless clients to only connect to the Internet through the ZyXEL Device. Select this check box to allow the ZyXEL Device to convert wireless multicast traffic into wireless unicast traffic. Select Basic (WEP) or More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK, WPA(2)) to add security on this wireless network. The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as the ZyXEL Device. When you select to use a security, additional options appears in this screen. Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without any data encryption or authentication. See the following sections for more details about this field. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 7.2.1 No Security Select No Security to allow wireless stations to communicate with the access points without any data encryption or authentication. Note: If you do not enable any wireless security on your ZyXEL Device, your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range. Figure 23 Wireless > General: No Security 90 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 7 Wireless The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 12 Wireless > General: No Security LABEL Security Level DESCRIPTION Choose No Security from the drop-down list box. 7.2.2 Basic (WEP Encryption) WEP encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless stations and the access points
(AP) to keep network communications private. Both the wireless stations and the access points must use the same WEP key. Note: WEP is extremely insecure. Its encryption can be broken by an attacker, using widely-available software. It is strongly recommended that you use a more effective security mechanism. Use the strongest security mechanism that all the wireless devices in your network support. For example, use WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK if all your wireless devices support it, or use WPA or WPA2 if your wireless devices support it and you have a RADIUS server. If your wireless devices support nothing stronger than WEP, use the highest encryption level available. Your ZyXEL Device allows you to configure up to four 64-bit or 128-bit WEP keys but only one key can be enabled at any one time. In order to configure and enable WEP encryption, click Network Settings > Wireless to display the General screen, then select Basic as the security level. Figure 24 Wireless > General: Basic (WEP) P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 91 Chapter 7 Wireless The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 13 Wireless > General: Basic (WEP) LABEL Security Level DESCRIPTION Select Basic to enable WEP data encryption. Generate password automatically Password 1~4 Select this option to have the ZyXEL Device automatically generate a password. The password field will not be configurable when you select this option. The password (WEP keys) are used to encrypt data. Both the ZyXEL Device and the wireless stations must use the same password (WEP key) for data transmission. If you chose 64-bit WEP, then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F"). If you chose 128-bit WEP, then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F"). You must configure at least one password, only one password can be activated at any one time. more.../less Click more... to show more fields in this section. Click less to hide them. WEP Encryption Select 64-bits or 128-bits. This dictates the length of the security key that the network is going to use. 92 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 7 Wireless 7.2.3 More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK) The WPA-PSK security mode provides both improved data encryption and user authentication over WEP. Using a Pre-Shared Key (PSK), both the ZyXEL Device and the connecting client share a common password in order to validate the connection. This type of encryption, while robust, is not as strong as WPA, WPA2 or even WPA2-PSK. The WPA2-PSK security mode is a newer, more robust version of the WPA encryption standard. It offers slightly better security, although the use of PSK makes it less robust than it could be. Click Network Settings > Wireless to display the General screen. Select More Secure as the security level. Then select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the Security Mode list. Figure 25 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)-PSK The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 14 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)-PSK LABEL Security Level DESCRIPTION Select More Secure to enable WPA(2)-PSK data encryption. Security Mode Select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the drop-down list box. Generate password automatically Password Select this option to have the ZyXEL Device automatically generate a password. The password field will not be configurable when you select this option. The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the same. The only difference between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific credentials. Type a pre-shared key from 8 to 64 case-sensitive keyboard characters. more.../less Click more... to show more fields in this section. Click less to hide them. WPA-PSK Compatible This field appears when you choose WPA-PSK2 as the Security Mode. Check this field to allow wireless devices using WPA-PSK security mode to connect to your ZyXEL Device. The ZyXEL Device supports WPA-PSK and WPA2-
PSK simultaneously. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 93 Chapter 7 Wireless Table 14 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)-PSK (continued) LABEL Encryption DESCRIPTION Select the encryption type (AES or TKIP+AES) for data encryption. Group Key Update Timer ReKey Method Select AES if your wireless clients can all use AES. Select TKIP+AES to allow the wireless clients to use either TKIP or AES. The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the RADIUS server sends a new group key out to all clients. The ZyXEL Device can automatically disconnect a wireless station from the wired network after a period of inactivity or after a certain number of packets have been processed. The wireless station needs to enter the username and password again before access to the wired network is allowed. Select TIME to have the ZyXEL Device automatically disconnects a wireless station from the wired network after a period of inactivity. Select NONE if you do not want the connection between the ZyXEL Device and a wireless station to time out. 7.2.4 WPA(2) Authentication The WPA2 security mode is currently the most robust form of encryption for wireless networks. It requires a RADIUS server to authenticate user credentials and is a full implementation the security protocol. Use this security option for maximum protection of your network. However, it is the least backwards compatible with older devices. The WPA security mode is a security subset of WPA2. It requires the presence of a RADIUS server on your network in order to validate user credentials. This encryption standard is slightly older than WPA2 and therefore is more compatible with older devices. Click Network Settings > Wireless to display the General screen. Select More Secure as the security level. Then select WPA or WPA2 from the Security Mode list. Figure 26 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2) 94 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 7 Wireless The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 15 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2) LABEL Security Level DESCRIPTION Select More Secure to enable WPA(2)-PSK data encryption. Security Mode Choose WPA or WPA2 from the drop-down list box. Authentication Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the external authentication server in dotted decimal notation. Port Number Enter the port number of the external authentication server. You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information. Shared Secret Enter a password (up to 31 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the external authentication server and the ZyXEL Device. The key must be the same on the external authentication server and your ZyXEL Device. The key is not sent over the network. more.../less Click more... to show more fields in this section. Click less to hide them. WPA Compatible This field is only available for WPA2. Select this if you want the ZyXEL Device to support WPA and WPA2 simultaneously. Encryption Select the encryption type (AES or TKIP+AES) for data encryption. Select AES if your wireless clients can all use AES. Select TKIP+AES to allow the wireless clients to use either TKIP or AES. Group Key Update Timer The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the RADIUS server sends a new group key out to all clients. ReKey Method The ZyXEL Device can automatically disconnect a wireless station from the wired network after a period of inactivity or after a certain number of packets have been processed. The wireless station needs to enter the username and password again before access to the wired network is allowed. Select TIME to have the ZyXEL Device automatically disconnects a wireless station from the wired network after a period of inactivity. Select NONE if you do not want the connection between the ZyXEL Device and a wireless station to time out. 7.3 The More AP Screen This screen allows you to enable and configure multiple Basic Service Sets (BSSs) on the ZyXEL Device. Click Network Settings > Wireless > More AP. The following screen displays. Figure 27 Network Settings > Wireless > More AP P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 95 Chapter 7 Wireless The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 16 Network Settings > Wireless > More AP LABEL
DESCRIPTION This is the index number of the entry. Status SSID This field indicates whether this SSID is active. A yellow bulb signifies that this SSID is active. A gray bulb signifies that this SSID is not active. An SSID profile is the set of parameters relating to one of the ZyXEL Devices BSSs. The SSID (Service Set IDentifier) identifies the Service Set with which a wireless device is associated. This field displays the name of the wireless profile on the network. When a wireless client scans for an AP to associate with, this is the name that is broadcast and seen in the wireless client utility. Security Modify This field indicates the security mode of the SSID profile. Click the Edit icon to configure the SSID profile. 7.3.1 Edit More AP Use this screen to edit an SSID profile. Click the Edit icon next to an SSID in the More AP screen. The following screen displays. Figure 28 More AP: Edit The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 17 More AP: Edit LABEL Wireless Network Setup DESCRIPTION Wireless You can Enable or Disable the wireless LAN in this field. Wireless Network Settings 96 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 7 Wireless Table 17 More AP: Edit (continued) DESCRIPTION LABEL The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a Wireless Network wireless device is associated. Wireless devices associating to the access Name (SSID) point (AP) must have the same SSID. Hide SSID Security Level Security Mode Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 English keyboard characters) for the wireless LAN. Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool. Select Basic (WEP) or More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK, WPA(2)) to add security on this wireless network. The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as the ZyXEL Device. After you select to use a security, additional options appears in this screen. Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without any data encryption or authentication. See Section 7.2.1 on page 90 for more details about this field. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 7.4 MAC Authentication This screen allows you to configure the ZyXEL Device to give exclusive access to specific devices
(Allow) or exclude specific devices from accessing the ZyXEL Device (Deny). Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You need to know the MAC addresses of the devices to configure this screen. Use this screen to view your ZyXEL Devices MAC filter settings and add new MAC filter rules. Click Wireless > MAC Authentication. The screen appears as shown. Figure 29 Wireless > MAC Authentication P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 97 Chapter 7 Wireless The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 18 Wireless > MAC Authentication LABEL SSID DESCRIPTION Select the SSID for which you want to configure MAC filter settings. MAC List Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the MAC Address table. Select Disable to turn off MAC filtering. Select Allow to permit access to the ZyXEL Device. MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the ZyXEL Device. Select Deny to block access to the ZyXEL Device. MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to access the ZyXEL Device. Click this if you want to add a new MAC address entry to the MAC filter list below. Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the ZyXEL Device in these address fields. Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal character pairs, for example, 12:34:56:78:9a:bc. Add new MAC address
This is the index number of the entry. MAC Address This is the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the ZyXEL Device. Modify Apply Cancel Click the Delete icon to delete the entry. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 7.5 The WPS Screen Use this screen to configure WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) on your ZyXEL Device. WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Set up each WPS connection between two devices. Both devices must support WPS. See Section 7.7.8.3 on page 109 for more information about WPS. Note: The ZyXEL Device applies the security settings of the SSID1 profile (see Section 7.2 on page 88). If you want to use the WPS feature, make sure you have set the security mode of SSID1 to WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK or No Security. 98 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Click Network Settings > Wireless > WPS. The following screen displays. Select Enable and click Apply to activate the WPS function. Then you can configure the WPS settings in this screen. Figure 30 Network Settings > Wireless > WPS Chapter 7 Wireless The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 19 Network Settings > Wireless > WPS LABEL Enable WPS DESCRIPTION Select Enable to activate WPS on the ZyXEL Device. Method 1 Connect Method 2 Register Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network using Push Button Configuration (PBC). Click this button to add another WPS-enabled wireless device (within wireless range of the ZyXEL Device) to your wireless network. This button may either be a physical button on the outside of device, or a menu button similar to the Connect button on this screen. Note: You must press the other wireless devices WPS button within two minutes of pressing this button. Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network by entering the PIN of the client into the ZyXEL Device. Enter the PIN of the device that you are setting up a WPS connection with and click Register to authenticate and add the wireless device to your wireless network. You can find the PIN either on the outside of the device, or by checking the devices settings. Note: You must also activate WPS on that device within two minutes to have it present its PIN to the ZyXEL Device. Method 3 Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network by entering the PIN of the ZyXEL Device into the client. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 99 Chapter 7 Wireless Table 19 Network Settings > Wireless > WPS (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION The default WPS status is configured. Release Configuration Click this button to remove all configured wireless and wireless security settings for WPS connections on the ZyXEL Device. Generate New PIN Number The PIN (Personal Identification Number) of the ZyXEL Device is shown here. Enter this PIN in the configuration utility of the device you want to connect to using WPS. The PIN is not necessary when you use WPS push-button method. Click the Generate New PIN Number button to have the ZyXEL Device create a new PIN. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 7.6 The Others Screen Use this screen to configure advanced wireless settings. Click Network Settings > Wireless >
Others. The screen appears as shown. See Section 7.7.2 on page 103 for detailed definitions of the terms listed in this screen. Figure 31 Network Settings > Wireless > Others The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 20 Network Settings > Wireless > Others LABEL RTS/CTS Threshold DESCRIPTION Data with its frame size larger than this value will perform the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear To Send) handshake. Enter a value between 0 and 2347. Fragmentation Threshold This is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent. Enter a value between 256 and 2346. Number of Wireless Stations Allowed Specify the maximum number of the wireless stations that may connect to the ZyXEL Device. 100 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 7 Wireless Table 20 Network Settings > Wireless > Others (continued) LABEL Output Power DESCRIPTION Set the output power of the ZyXEL Device. If there is a high density of APs in an area, decrease the output power to reduce interference with other APs. Select one of the following: 20%, 40%, 60%, 80% or 100%. 802.11 Mode Select 802.11b Only to allow only IEEE 802.11b compliant WLAN devices to associate with the ZyXEL Device. Select 802.11g Only to allow only IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the ZyXEL Device. Select 802.11n Only to allow only IEEE 802.11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the ZyXEL Device. Select 802.11b/g Mixed to allow either IEEE 802.11b or IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the ZyXEL Device. The transmission rate of your ZyXEL Device might be reduced. Select 802.11b/g/n Mixed to allow IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g or IEEE802.11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the ZyXEL Device. The transmission rate of your ZyXEL Device might be reduced. 802.11 Protection Enabling this feature can help prevent collisions in mixed-mode networks
(networks with both IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g traffic). Select Auto to have the wireless devices transmit data after a RTS/CTS handshake. This helps improve IEEE 802.11g performance. Select Off to disable 802.11 protection. The transmission rate of your ZyXEL Device might be reduced in a mixed-mode network. This field displays Off and is not configurable when you set 802.11 Mode to 802.11b Only. Preamble Select a preamble type from the drop-down list box. Choices are Long or Short. See Section 7.7.7 on page 107 for more information. This field is configurable only when you set 802.11 Mode to 802.11b Only or 802.11b/g Mixed. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 7.7 Technical Reference This section discusses wireless LANs in depth. For more information, see the appendix. 7.7.1 Wireless Network Overview Wireless networks consist of wireless clients, access points and bridges. A wireless client is a radio connected to a users computer. An access point is a radio with a wired connection to a network, which can connect with numerous wireless clients and let them access the network. A bridge is a radio that relays communications between access points and wireless clients, extending a networks range. Traditionally, a wireless network operates in one of two ways. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 101 Chapter 7 Wireless An infrastructure type of network has one or more access points and one or more wireless clients. The wireless clients connect to the access points. An ad-hoc type of network is one in which there is no access point. Wireless clients connect to one another in order to exchange information. The following figure provides an example of a wireless network. Figure 32 Example of a Wireless Network The wireless network is the part in the blue circle. In this wireless network, devices A and B use the access point (AP) to interact with the other devices (such as the printer) or with the Internet. Your ZyXEL Device is the AP. Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines. Every device in the same wireless network must use the same SSID. The SSID is the name of the wireless network. It stands for Service Set IDentifier. If two wireless networks overlap, they should use a different channel. Like radio stations or television channels, each wireless network uses a specific channel, or frequency, to send and receive information. Every device in the same wireless network must use security compatible with the AP. Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network. It can also protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Radio Channels In the radio spectrum, there are certain frequency bands allocated for unlicensed, civilian use. For the purposes of wireless networking, these bands are divided into numerous channels. This allows a 102 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 7 Wireless variety of networks to exist in the same place without interfering with one another. When you create a network, you must select a channel to use. Since the available unlicensed spectrum varies from one country to another, the number of available channels also varies. 7.7.2 Additional Wireless Terms The following table describes some wireless network terms and acronyms used in the ZyXEL Devices Web Configurator. Table 21 Additional Wireless Terms TERM DESCRIPTION In a wireless network which covers a large area, wireless devices are RTS/CTS Threshold sometimes not aware of each others presence. This may cause them to send information to the AP at the same time and result in information colliding and not getting through. By setting this value lower than the default value, the wireless devices must sometimes get permission to send information to the ZyXEL Device. The lower the value, the more often the devices must get permission. If this value is greater than the fragmentation threshold value (see below), then wireless devices never have to get permission to send information to the ZyXEL Device. A preamble affects the timing in your wireless network. There are two preamble modes: long and short. If a device uses a different preamble mode than the ZyXEL Device does, it cannot communicate with the ZyXEL Device. Preamble Authentication The process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network. Fragmentation Threshold A small fragmentation threshold is recommended for busy networks, while a larger threshold provides faster performance if the network is not very busy. 7.7.3 Wireless Security Overview By their nature, radio communications are simple to intercept. For wireless data networks, this means that anyone within range of a wireless network without security can not only read the data passing over the airwaves, but also join the network. Once an unauthorized person has access to the network, he or she can steal information or introduce malware (malicious software) intended to compromise the network. For these reasons, a variety of security systems have been developed to ensure that only authorized people can use a wireless data network, or understand the data carried on it. These security standards do two things. First, they authenticate. This means that only people presenting the right credentials (often a username and password, or a key phrase) can access the network. Second, they encrypt. This means that the information sent over the air is encoded. Only people with the code key can understand the information, and only people who have been authenticated are given the code key. These security standards vary in effectiveness. Some can be broken, such as the old Wired Equivalent Protocol (WEP). Using WEP is better than using no security at all, but it will not keep a determined attacker out. Other security standards are secure in themselves but can be broken if a user does not use them properly. For example, the WPA-PSK security standard is very secure if you use a long key which is difficult for an attackers software to guess - for example, a twenty-letter P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 103 Chapter 7 Wireless long string of apparently random numbers and letters - but it is not very secure if you use a short key which is very easy to guess - for example, a three-letter word from the dictionary. Because of the damage that can be done by a malicious attacker, its not just people who have sensitive information on their network who should use security. Everybody who uses any wireless network should ensure that effective security is in place. A good way to come up with effective security keys, passwords and so on is to use obscure information that you personally will easily remember, and to enter it in a way that appears random and does not include real words. For example, if your mother owns a 1970 Dodge Challenger and her favorite movie is Vanishing Point (which you know was made in 1971) you could use 70dodchal71vanpoi as your security key. The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the wireless network. 7.7.3.1 SSID Normally, the ZyXEL Device acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area. You can hide the SSID instead, in which case the ZyXEL Device does not broadcast the SSID. In addition, you should change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess. This type of security is fairly weak, however, because there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the SSID. In addition, unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network. 7.7.3.2 MAC Address Filter Every device that can use a wireless network has a unique identification number, called a MAC address.1 A MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal characters2; for example, 00A0C5000002 or 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. To get the MAC address for each device in the wireless network, see the devices Users Guide or other documentation. You can use the MAC address filter to tell the ZyXEL Device which devices are allowed or not allowed to use the wireless network. If a device is allowed to use the wireless network, it still has to have the correct information (SSID, channel, and security). If a device is not allowed to use the wireless network, it does not matter if it has the correct information. This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the MAC address of an authorized device. Then, they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network. 7.7.3.3 User Authentication Authentication is the process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network. You can make every user log in to the wireless network before using it. However, every device in the wireless network has to support IEEE 802.1x to do this. For wireless networks, you can store the user names and passwords for each user in a RADIUS server. This is a server used in businesses more than in homes. If you do not have a RADIUS server, you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users. 1. Some wireless devices, such as scanners, can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks. These kinds of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses. 2. Hexadecimal characters are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F. 104 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 7 Wireless Unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network, even if they cannot use the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless users to get a valid user name and password. Then, they can use that user name and password to use the wireless network. 7.7.3.4 Encryption Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Encryption is like a secret code. If you do not know the secret code, you cannot understand the message. The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of authentication. (See Section 7.7.3.3 on page 104 for information about this.) Table 22 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication Weakest NO AUTHENTICATION No Security RADIUS SERVER WPA Static WEP WPA-PSK Strongest WPA2-PSK WPA2 For example, if the wireless network has a RADIUS server, you can choose WPA or WPA2. If users do not log in to the wireless network, you can choose no encryption, Static WEP, WPA-PSK, or WPA2-PSK. Usually, you should set up the strongest encryption that every device in the wireless network supports. For example, suppose you have a wireless network with the ZyXEL Device and you do not have a RADIUS server. Therefore, there is no authentication. Suppose the wireless network has two devices. Device A only supports WEP, and device B supports WEP and WPA. Therefore, you should set up Static WEP in the wireless network. Note: It is recommended that wireless networks use WPA-PSK, WPA, or stronger encryption. The other types of encryption are better than none at all, but it is still possible for unauthorized wireless devices to figure out the original information pretty quickly. When you select WPA2 or WPA2-PSK in your ZyXEL Device, you can also select an option (WPA compatible) to support WPA as well. In this case, if some of the devices support WPA and some support WPA2, you should set up WPA2-PSK or WPA2 (depending on the type of wireless network login) and select the WPA compatible option in the ZyXEL Device. Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network. The longer the key, the stronger the encryption. Every device in the wireless network must have the same key. 7.7.4 Signal Problems Because wireless networks are radio networks, their signals are subject to limitations of distance, interference and absorption. Problems with distance occur when the two radios are too far apart. Problems with interference occur when other radio waves interrupt the data signal. Interference may come from other radio P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 105 Chapter 7 Wireless transmissions, such as military or air traffic control communications, or from machines that are coincidental emitters such as electric motors or microwaves. Problems with absorption occur when physical objects (such as thick walls) are between the two radios, muffling the signal. 7.7.5 BSS A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless stations or between a wireless station and a wired network client go through one access point (AP). Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless stations in the BSS. When Intra-BSS traffic blocking is disabled, wireless station A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other. When Intra-BSS traffic blocking is enabled, wireless station A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other. Figure 33 Basic Service set 7.7.6 MBSSID Traditionally, you need to use different APs to configure different Basic Service Sets (BSSs). As well as the cost of buying extra APs, there is also the possibility of channel interference. The ZyXEL Devices MBSSID (Multiple Basic Service Set IDentifier) function allows you to use one access point to provide several BSSs simultaneously. You can then assign varying QoS priorities and/or security modes to different SSIDs. Wireless devices can use different BSSIDs to associate with the same AP. 106 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 7 Wireless 7.7.6.1 Notes on Multiple BSSs A maximum of eight BSSs are allowed on one AP simultaneously. You must use different keys for different BSSs. If two wireless devices have different BSSIDs
(they are in different BSSs), but have the same keys, they may hear each others communications (but not communicate with each other). MBSSID should not replace but rather be used in conjunction with 802.1x security. 7.7.7 Preamble Type Preamble is used to signal that data is coming to the receiver. Short and long refer to the length of the synchronization field in a packet. Short preamble increases performance as less time sending preamble means more time for sending data. All IEEE 802.11 compliant wireless adapters support long preamble, but not all support short preamble. Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode other wireless devices on the network support, and to provide more reliable communications in busy wireless networks. Use short preamble if you are sure all wireless devices on the network support it, and to provide more efficient communications. Use the dynamic setting to automatically use short preamble when all wireless devices on the network support it, otherwise the ZyXEL Device uses long preamble. Note: The wireless devices MUST use the same preamble mode in order to communicate. 7.7.8 WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) Your ZyXEL Device supports WiFi Protected Setup (WPS), which is an easy way to set up a secure wireless network. WPS is an industry standard specification, defined by the WiFi Alliance. WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Each WPS connection works between two devices. Both devices must support WPS (check each devices documentation to make sure). Depending on the devices you have, you can either press a button (on the device itself, or in its configuration utility) or enter a PIN (a unique Personal Identification Number that allows one device to authenticate the other) in each of the two devices. When WPS is activated on a device, it has two minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated. Then, the two devices connect and set up a secure network by themselves. 7.7.8.1 Push Button Configuration WPS Push Button Configuration (PBC) is initiated by pressing a button on each WPS-enabled device, and allowing them to connect automatically. You do not need to enter any information. Not every WPS-enabled device has a physical WPS button. Some may have a WPS PBC button in their configuration utilities instead of or in addition to the physical button. Take the following steps to set up WPS using the button. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 107 Chapter 7 Wireless 1 2 3 Ensure that the two devices you want to set up are within wireless range of one another. Look for a WPS button on each device. If the device does not have one, log into its configuration utility and locate the button (see the devices Users Guide for how to do this - for the ZyXEL Device, see Section 7.6 on page 100). Press the button on one of the devices (it doesnt matter which). For the ZyXEL Device you must press the WPS button for more than three seconds. 4 Within two minutes, press the button on the other device. The registrar sends the network name
(SSID) and security key through an secure connection to the enrollee. If you need to make sure that WPS worked, check the list of associated wireless clients in the APs configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful. 7.7.8.2 PIN Configuration Each WPS-enabled device has its own PIN (Personal Identification Number). This may either be static (it cannot be changed) or dynamic (in some devices you can generate a new PIN by clicking on a button in the configuration interface). Use the PIN method instead of the push-button configuration (PBC) method if you want to ensure that the connection is established between the devices you specify, not just the first two devices to activate WPS in range of each other. However, you need to log into the configuration interfaces of both devices to use the PIN method. When you use the PIN method, you must enter the PIN from one device (usually the wireless client) into the second device (usually the Access Point or wireless router). Then, when WPS is activated on the first device, it presents its PIN to the second device. If the PIN matches, one device sends the network and security information to the other, allowing it to join the network. Take the following steps to set up a WPS connection between an access point or wireless router
(referred to here as the AP) and a client device using the PIN method. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Ensure WPS is enabled on both devices. Access the WPS section of the APs configuration interface. See the devices Users Guide for how to do this. Look for the clients WPS PIN; it will be displayed either on the device, or in the WPS section of the clients configuration interface (see the devices Users Guide for how to find the WPS PIN - for the ZyXEL Device, see Section 7.5 on page 98). Enter the clients PIN in the APs configuration interface. If the client devices configuration interface has an area for entering another devices PIN, you can either enter the clients PIN in the AP, or enter the APs PIN in the client - it does not matter which. Start WPS on both devices within two minutes. 7 Use the configuration utility to activate WPS, not the push-button on the device itself. 108 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 7 Wireless 8 On a computer connected to the wireless client, try to connect to the Internet. If you can connect, WPS was successful. If you cannot connect, check the list of associated wireless clients in the APs configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful. The following figure shows a WPS-enabled wireless client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to the WPS-enabled AP via the PIN method. Figure 34 Example WPS Process: PIN Method ENROLLEE REGISTRAR WPS This devices WPS PIN: 123456 WPS Enter WPS PIN from other device:
WPS WPS START START WITHIN 2 MINUTES SECURE EAP TUNNEL SSID WPA(2)-PSK COMMUNICATION 7.7.8.3 How WPS Works When two WPS-enabled devices connect, each device must assume a specific role. One device acts as the registrar (the device that supplies network and security settings) and the other device acts as the enrollee (the device that receives network and security settings. The registrar creates a secure EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) tunnel and sends the network name (SSID) and the WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK pre-shared key to the enrollee. Whether WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK is used P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 109 Chapter 7 Wireless depends on the standards supported by the devices. If the registrar is already part of a network, it sends the existing information. If not, it generates the SSID and WPA(2)-PSK randomly. The following figure shows a WPS-enabled client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to a WPS-enabled access point. Figure 35 How WPS works ACTIVATE WPS WITHIN 2 MINUTES ACTIVATE WPS ENROLLEE WPS HANDSHAKE SECURE TUNNEL SECURITY INFO COMMUNICATION REGISTRAR The roles of registrar and enrollee last only as long as the WPS setup process is active (two minutes). The next time you use WPS, a different device can be the registrar if necessary. The WPS connection process is like a handshake; only two devices participate in each WPS transaction. If you want to add more devices you should repeat the process with one of the existing networked devices and the new device. Note that the access point (AP) is not always the registrar, and the wireless client is not always the enrollee. All WPS-certified APs can be a registrar, and so can some WPS-enabled wireless clients. By default, a WPS devices is unconfigured. This means that it is not part of an existing network and can act as either enrollee or registrar (if it supports both functions). If the registrar is unconfigured, the security settings it transmits to the enrollee are randomly-generated. Once a WPS-enabled device has connected to another device using WPS, it becomes configured. A configured wireless client can still act as enrollee or registrar in subsequent WPS connections, but a configured access point can no longer act as enrollee. It will be the registrar in all subsequent WPS connections in which it is involved. If you want a configured AP to act as an enrollee, you must reset it to its factory defaults. 7.7.8.4 Example WPS Network Setup This section shows how security settings are distributed in an example WPS setup. 110 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 7 Wireless The following figure shows an example network. In step 1, both AP1 and Client 1 are unconfigured. When WPS is activated on both, they perform the handshake. In this example, AP1 is the registrar, and Client 1 is the enrollee. The registrar randomly generates the security information to set up the network, since it is unconfigured and has no existing information. Figure 36 WPS: Example Network Step 1 ENROLLEE CLIENT 1 SECURITY INFO REGISTRAR AP1 In step 2, you add another wireless client to the network. You know that Client 1 supports registrar mode, but it is better to use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new client since you must connect to the access point anyway in order to use the network. In this case, AP1 must be the registrar, since it is configured (it already has security information for the network). AP1 supplies the existing security information to Client 2. Figure 37 WPS: Example Network Step 2 REGISTRAR AP1 EXISTING CONNECTION O F Y I N R I T U C E S CLIENT 1 ENROLLEE CLIENT 2 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 111 Chapter 7 Wireless In step 3, you add another access point (AP2) to your network. AP2 is out of range of AP1, so you cannot use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new access point. However, you know that Client 2 supports the registrar function, so you use it to perform the WPS handshake instead. Figure 38 WPS: Example Network Step 3 CLIENT 1 REGISTRAR CLIENT 2 EXISTING CONNECTION N T I O C E N N O C G T I N X I S E SECURITYINFO AP1 ENROLLEE AP2 7.7.8.5 Limitations of WPS WPS has some limitations of which you should be aware. WPS works in Infrastructure networks only (where an AP and a wireless client communicate). It does not work in Ad-Hoc networks (where there is no AP). When you use WPS, it works between two devices only. You cannot enroll multiple devices simultaneously, you must enroll one after the other. For instance, if you have two enrollees and one registrar you must set up the first enrollee (by pressing the WPS button on the registrar and the first enrollee, for example), then check that it successfully enrolled, then set up the second device in the same way. WPS works only with other WPS-enabled devices. However, you can still add non-WPS devices to a network you already set up using WPS. WPS works by automatically issuing a randomly-generated WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK pre-shared key from the registrar device to the enrollee devices. Whether the network uses WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK depends on the device. You can check the configuration interface of the registrar device to discover the key the network is using (if the device supports this feature). Then, you can enter the key into the non-WPS device and join the network as normal (the non-WPS device must also support WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK). 112 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 7 Wireless When you use the PBC method, there is a short period (from the moment you press the button on one device to the moment you press the button on the other device) when any WPS-enabled device could join the network. This is because the registrar has no way of identifying the correct enrollee, and cannot differentiate between your enrollee and a rogue device. This is a possible way for a hacker to gain access to a network. You can easily check to see if this has happened. WPS works between only two devices simultaneously, so if another device has enrolled your device will be unable to enroll, and will not have access to the network. If this happens, open the access points configuration interface and look at the list of associated clients (usually displayed by MAC address). It does not matter if the access point is the WPS registrar, the enrollee, or was not involved in the WPS handshake; a rogue device must still associate with the access point to gain access to the network. Check the MAC addresses of your wireless clients (usually printed on a label on the bottom of the device). If there is an unknown MAC address you can remove it or reset the AP. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 113 Chapter 7 Wireless 114 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide CHAPTER 8 Home Networking 8.1 Overview A Local Area Network (LAN) is a shared communication system to which many networking devices are connected. It is usually located in one immediate area such as a building or floor of a building. Use the LAN screens to help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP addresses. LAN DSL 8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the LAN Setup screen to set the LAN IP address, subnet mask, and DHCP settings of your ZyXEL device (Section 8.2 on page 117). Use the Static DHCP screen to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses (Section 8.3 on page 119). Use the UPnP screen to enable UPnP and UPnP NAT traversal on the ZyXEL Device (Section 8.4 on page 121). Use the STB Vendor ID screen to have the ZyXEL Device automatically create static DHCP entries for Set Top Box (STB) devices when they request IP addresses (Section 8.7 on page 129). Use the HPNA screen to enable or disable the HPNA port (Section 8.8 on page 130). Use the 5th Ethernet Port screen to configure the Ethernet WAN port as a LAN port (Section 8.9 on page 130). Use the LAN VLAN screen to control the VLAN ID and IEEE 802.1p priority tags of traffic sent out through individual LAN ports (Section 8.10 on page 131). P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 115 Chapter 8 Home Networking 8.1.2 What You Need To Know 8.1.2.1 About LAN IP Address IP addresses identify individual devices on a network. Every networking device (including computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to communicate across the network. These networking devices are also known as hosts. Subnet Mask Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network. You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub-networks. DHCP A DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server can assign your ZyXEL Device an IP address, subnet mask, DNS and other routing information when it's turned on. DNS DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a networking device before you can access it. 8.1.2.2 About UPnP Identifying UPnP Devices UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder (Windows XP). Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon. Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device. NAT Traversal UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT. UPnP network devices can automatically configure network addressing, announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions. NAT traversal allows the following:
Dynamic port mapping Learning public IP addresses Assigning lease times to mappings Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP. See the Chapter 11 on page 159 for more information on NAT. 116 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 8 Home Networking Cautions with UPnP The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues. Network information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments. When a UPnP device joins a network, it announces its presence with a multicast message. For security reasons, the ZyXEL Device allows multicast messages on the LAN only. All UPnP-enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration. Disable UPnP if this is not your intention. UPnP and ZyXEL ZyXEL has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum UPnP Implementers Corp. (UIC). ZyXEL's UPnP implementation supports Internet Gateway Device (IGD) 1.0. See Section 8.5 on page 121 for examples of installing and using UPnP. Finding Out More See Section 8.11 on page 132 for technical background information on LANs. 8.1.3 Before You Begin Find out the MAC addresses of your network devices if you intend to add them to the DHCP Client List screen. 8.2 The LAN Setup Screen Use this screen to set the Local Area Network IP address and subnet mask of your ZyXEL Device. Click Network Settings > Home Networking to open the LAN Setup screen. Follow these steps to configure your LAN settings. 1 2 Enter an IP address into the IP Address field. The IP address must be in dotted decimal notation. This will become the IP address of your ZyXEL Device. Enter the IP subnet mask into the IP Subnet Mask field. Unless instructed otherwise it is best to leave this alone, the configurator will automatically compute a subnet mask based upon the IP address you entered. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 117 Chapter 8 Home Networking 3 Click Apply to save your settings. Figure 39 Network Settings > Home Networking > LAN Setup The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 23 Network Settings > Home Networking > LAN Setup LABEL Group Name DESCRIPTION Select the interface group name for which you want to configure LAN settings. See Chapter 14 on page 189 for how to create a new interface group. LAN IP Setup IP Address Subnet Mask DHCP Server State DHCP Enter the LAN IP address you want to assign to your ZyXEL Device in dotted decimal notation, for example, 192.168.1.1 (factory default). Type the subnet mask of your network in dotted decimal notation, for example 255.255.255.0 (factory default). Your ZyXEL Device automatically computes the subnet mask based on the IP Address you enter, so do not change this field unless you are instructed to do so. Select Enable to have the ZyXEL Device act as a DHCP server or DHCP relay agent. Select Disable to stop the DHCP server on the ZyXEL Device. Select DHCP Relay to have the ZyXEL Device forward DHCP request to the DHCP server. 118 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 8 Home Networking Table 23 Network Settings > Home Networking > LAN Setup (continued) LABEL DHCP Relay Server Address DESCRIPTION This field is only available when you select DHCP Relay in the DHCP field. IP Address Enter the IP address of the actual remote DHCP server in this field. IP Addressing Values Beginning IP Address This field is only available when you select Enable in the DHCP field. This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool. Ending IP Address This field specifies the last of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool. DHCP Server Lease Time Days/Hours/
Minutes DNS Values DNS DNS Server 1 DNS Server 2 Apply Cancel This is the period of time DHCP-assigned addresses is used. DHCP automatically assigns IP addresses to clients when they log in. DHCP centralizes IP address management on central computers that run the DHCP server program. DHCP leases addresses, for a period of time, which means that past addresses are recycled and made available for future reassignment to other systems. This field is only available when you select Enable in the DHCP field. Enter the lease time of the DHCP server. This field is only available when you select Enable in the DHCP field. Select the type of service that you are registered for from your Dynamic DNS service provider. Select Dynamic if you have the Dynamic DNS service. Select Static if you have the Static DNS service. Enter the first and second DNS (Domain Name System) server IP address the ZyXEL Device passes to the DHCP clients. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 8.3 The Static DHCP Screen This table allows you to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses. Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. Use this screen to change your ZyXEL Devices static DHCP settings. Click Network Settings >
Home Networking > Static DHCP to open the following screen. Figure 40 Network Settings > Home Networking > Static DHCP P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 119 Chapter 8 Home Networking The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 24 Network Settings > Home Networking > Static DHCP LABEL Add new static lease DESCRIPTION Click this to add a new static DHCP entry.
Status MAC Address This is the index number of the entry. This field displays whether the client is connected to the ZyXEL Device. The MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address on a LAN (Local Area Network) is unique to your computer (six pairs of hexadecimal notation). A network interface card such as an Ethernet adapter has a hardwired address that is assigned at the factory. This address follows an industry standard that ensures no other adapter has a similar address. IP Address This field displays the IP address relative to the # field listed above. Modify Click the Edit icon to have the IP address field editable and change it. Click the Delete icon to delete a static DHCP entry. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the selected entry. If you click Add new static lease in the Static DHCP screen or the Edit icon next to a static DHCP entry, the following screen displays. Figure 41 Static DHCP: Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 25 Static DHCP: Add/Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION This field displays whether the client is connected to the ZyXEL Device. Active Group Name Select the interface group name for which you want to configure Static DHCP settings. See Chapter 14 on page 189 for how to create a new interface group. Select Device Info MAC Address IP Address If you select Manual Input, you can manually type in the MAC address and IP address of a computer on your LAN. You can also choose the name of a computer from the drop list and have the MAC Address and IP Address auto-
detected. If you select Manual Input in the Select Device Info field, enter the MAC address of a computer on your LAN. If you select Manual Input in the Select Device Info field, enter the IP address that you want to assign to the computer on your LAN with the MAC address that you will also specify. 120 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 8 Home Networking Table 25 Static DHCP: Add/Edit (continued) LABEL Apply DESCRIPTION Click Apply to save your changes. Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 8.4 The UPnP Screen Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a distributed, open networking standard that uses TCP/IP for simple peer-to-peer network connectivity between devices. A UPnP device can dynamically join a network, obtain an IP address, convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network. In turn, a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use. See page 116 for more information on UPnP. Use the following screen to enable or disable the UPnP function on your ZyXEL Device. Click Network Settings > Home Networking > UPnP to display the screen shown next. Figure 42 Network Settings > Home Networking > UPnP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 26 Network Settings > Home Networking > UPnP LABEL State DESCRIPTION Select Enable to activate UPnP. Be aware that anyone could use a UPnP application to open the web configurator's login screen without entering the ZyXEL Device's IP address (although you must still enter the password to access the web configurator). Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 8.5 Installing UPnP in Windows Example This section shows how to install UPnP in Windows Me and Windows XP. Installing UPnP in Windows Me Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows Me. 1 Click Start and Control Panel. Double-click Add/Remove Programs. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 121 Chapter 8 Home Networking 2 Click on the Windows Setup tab and select Communication in the Components selection box. Click Details. Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication 3 In the Communications window, select the Universal Plug and Play check box in the Components selection box. Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication: Components 122 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Click OK to go back to the Add/Remove Programs Properties window and click Next. Chapter 8 Home Networking Restart the computer when prompted. Installing UPnP in Windows XP Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows XP. Click Start and Control Panel. 4 5 1 2 Double-click Network Connections. 3 4 In the Network Connections window, click Advanced in the main menu and select Optional Networking Components . Network Connections The Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard window displays. Select Networking Service in the Components selection box and click Details. Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 123 Chapter 8 Home Networking 5 In the Networking Services window, select the Universal Plug and Play check box. Networking Services 6 Click OK to go back to the Windows Optional Networking Component Wizard window and click Next. 8.6 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP. You must already have UPnP installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the ZyXEL Device. Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the ZyXEL Device. Turn on your computer and the ZyXEL Device. Auto-discover Your UPnP-enabled Network Device 1 Click Start and Control Panel. Double-click Network Connections. An icon displays under Internet Gateway. 124 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 2 Right-click the icon and select Properties. Network Connections Chapter 8 Home Networking 3 In the Internet Connection Properties window, click Settings to see the port mappings there were automatically created. Internet Connection Properties P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 125 Chapter 8 Home Networking 4 You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port mappings. Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings: Add 5 When the UPnP-enabled device is disconnected from your computer, all port mappings will be deleted automatically. 6 Select Show icon in notification area when connected option and click OK. An icon displays in the system tray. System Tray Icon 126 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 7 Double-click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status. Internet Connection Status Chapter 8 Home Networking Web Configurator Easy Access With UPnP, you can access the web-based configurator on the ZyXEL Device without finding out the IP address of the ZyXEL Device first. This comes helpful if you do not know the IP address of the ZyXEL Device. Follow the steps below to access the web configurator. 1 Click Start and then Control Panel. 2 Double-click Network Connections. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 127 Chapter 8 Home Networking 3 Select My Network Places under Other Places. Network Connections 4 5 An icon with the description for each UPnP-enabled device displays under Local Network. Right-click on the icon for your ZyXEL Device and select Invoke. The web configurator login screen displays. Network Connections: My Network Places 128 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 6 Right-click on the icon for your ZyXEL Device and select Properties. A properties window displays with basic information about the ZyXEL Device. Network Connections: My Network Places: Properties: Example Chapter 8 Home Networking 8.7 The STB Vendor ID Screen Click Network Settings > Home Networking > STB Vendor ID to open this screen. Set Top Box (STB) devices with dynamic IP addresses sometimes dont renew their IP addresses before the lease time expires. This could lead to IP address conflicts if the STB continues to use an IP address that gets assigned to another device. Use this screen to list the Vendor IDs of connected STBs to have the ZyXEL Device automatically create static DHCP entries for them when they request IP addresses. Figure 43 Network Settings > Home Networking > STB Vendor ID P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 129 Chapter 8 Home Networking The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 27 Network Settings > Home Networking > STB Vendor ID LABEL Vendor ID 1 ~ 5 DESCRIPTION Enter the STBs vendor ID. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 8.8 The HPNA Screen Click Network Settings > Home Networking > HPNA to open this screen. Use this screen to enable or disable the HPNA port. See Chapter 1 on page 23 for more information on HPNA. Figure 44 Network Settings > Home Networking > HPNA The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 28 Network Settings > Home Networking > HPNA LABEL State DESCRIPTION Select Enable to activate the HPNA port on the ZyXEL Device. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 8.9 The 5th Ethernet Port Screen If you are using DSL connection, you can configure your Ethernet WAN port as an extra LAN port. This fifth Ethernet port provides faster speed since it is a Gigabit port. Click Network Settings >
Home Networking > 5th Ethernet Port to open this screen. Figure 45 Network Settings > Home Networking > 5th Ethernet Port 130 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 8 Home Networking The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 29 Network Settings > Home Networking > 5th Ethernet Port LABEL State DESCRIPTION Select Enable to use the Ethernet WAN port as a LAN port on the ZyXEL Device. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 8.10 The LAN VLAN Screen Click Network Settings > Home Networking > LAN VLAN to open this screen. Use this screen to control the VLAN ID and IEEE 802.1p priority tags of traffic sent out through individual LAN ports. Figure 46 Network Settings > Home Networking > LAN VLAN The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 30 Network Settings > Home Networking > LAN VLAN LABEL Lan Port DESCRIPTION These represent the ZyXEL Devices LAN ports. Tag Operation Select what you want the ZyXEL Device to do to the IEEE 802.1q VLAN ID and priority tags of downstream traffic before sending it out through this LAN port. Unchange - Dont do anything to the traffics VLAN ID and priority tags. Add - Add VLAN ID and priority tags to untagged traffic. Remove - Delete one tag from tagged traffic. If the frame has double tags, this removes the outer tag. This does not affect untagged traffic. Remark - Change the value of the outer VLAN ID and priority tags. Use this option to set what to do for the IEEE 802.1p priority tags when you add or remark the tags for a LAN ports downstream traffic. Either select Unchange to not modify the traffics priority tags or select an priority from 0 to 7 to use. The larger the number, the higher the priority. 802.1P Mark P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 131 Chapter 8 Home Networking Table 30 Network Settings > Home Networking > LAN VLAN (continued) LABEL VLAN ID DESCRIPTION If you will add or remark tags for this LAN ports downstream traffic, specify the VLAN ID (from 0 to 4094) to use here. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 8.11 Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter. 8.11.1 LANs, WANs and the ZyXEL Device The actual physical connection determines whether the ZyXEL Device ports are LAN or WAN ports. There are two separate IP networks, one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN network as shown next. Figure 47 LAN and WAN IP Addresses LAN WAN 8.11.2 DHCP Setup DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the ZyXEL Device as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a server, the ZyXEL Device provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If you turn DHCP service off, you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computer must be manually configured. IP Pool Setup The ZyXEL Device is pre-configured with a pool of IP addresses for the DHCP clients (DHCP Pool). See the product specifications in the appendices. Do not assign static IP addresses from the DHCP pool to your LAN computers. 132 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 8.11.3 DNS Server Addresses Chapter 8 Home Networking DNS (Domain Name System) maps a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The DNS server addresses you enter when you set up DHCP are passed to the client machines along with the assigned IP address and subnet mask. There are two ways that an ISP disseminates the DNS server addresses. The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, enter them in the DNS Server fields in the DHCP Setup screen. Some ISPs choose to disseminate the DNS server addresses using the DNS server extensions of IPCP (IP Control Protocol) after the connection is up. If your ISP did not give you explicit DNS servers, chances are the DNS servers are conveyed through IPCP negotiation. The ZyXEL Device supports the IPCP DNS server extensions through the DNS proxy feature. Please note that DNS proxy works only when the ISP uses the IPCP DNS server extensions. It does not mean you can leave the DNS servers out of the DHCP setup under all circumstances. If your ISP gives you explicit DNS servers, make sure that you enter their IP addresses in the DHCP Setup screen. 8.11.4 LAN TCP/IP The ZyXEL Device has built-in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability. IP Address and Subnet Mask Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name, so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number. Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask. If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. If this is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.0 and you must enable the Network Address Translation (NAT) feature of the ZyXEL Device. The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. Let's say you select 192.168.1.0 as the network number; which covers 254 individual addresses, from 192.168.1.1 to 192.168.1.254 (zero and 255 are reserved). In other words, the first three numbers specify the network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network. Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address that is easy to remember, for instance, 192.168.1.1, for your ZyXEL Device, but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 133 Chapter 8 Home Networking The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your ZyXEL Device will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by the ZyXEL Device unless you are instructed to do otherwise. Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the Internet, for example, only between your two branch offices, you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:
10.0.0.0 10.255.255.255 172.16.0.0 172.31.255.255 192.168.0.0 192.168.255.255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses. Note: Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address;
always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment, please refer to RFC 1597, Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466, Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space. 134 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide CHAPTER 9 Static Routing 9.1 Overview The ZyXEL Device usually uses the default gateway to route outbound traffic from computers on the LAN to the Internet. To have the ZyXEL Device send data to devices not reachable through the default gateway, use static routes. For example, the next figure shows a computer (A) connected to the ZyXEL Devices LAN interface. The ZyXEL Device routes most traffic from A to the Internet through the ZyXEL Devices default gateway (R1). You create one static route to connect to services offered by your ISP behind router R2. You create another static route to communicate with a separate network behind a router R3 connected to the LAN. Figure 48 Example of Static Routing Topology A R3 LAN WAN R1 R2 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 135 Chapter 9 Static Routing 9.2 The Routing Screen Use this screen to view and configure the static route rules on the ZyXEL Device. Click Network Settings > Routing > Static Route to open the following screen. Figure 49 Network Settings > Routing > Static Route The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 31 Network Settings > Routing > Static Route LABEL Add new Static Route Entry DESCRIPTION Click this to configure a new static route.
Status Name This is the index number of the entry. This field displays whether the static route is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this route is active. A gray bulb signifies that this route is not active. This is the name that describes or identifies this route. Destination IP This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number. Subnet Mask This parameter specifies the IP network subnet mask of the final destination. Gateway This is the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations. Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the static route on the ZyXEL Device. Click the Delete icon to remove a static route from the ZyXEL Device. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the route. 136 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 9.2.1 Add/Edit Static Route Use this screen to add or edit a static route. Click Add new Static Route Entry in the Routing screen or the Edit icon next to the static route you want to edit. The screen shown next appears. Figure 50 Routing: Add/Edit Chapter 9 Static Routing The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 32 Routing: Add/Edit LABEL Active DESCRIPTION This field allows you to activate/deactivate this static route. Select this to enable the static route. Clear this to disable this static route without having to delete the entry. Route Name Enter a descriptive name for the static route. Destination IP Address This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number. If you need to specify a route to a single host, use a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID. IP Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask here. Use Interface Select a WAN interface through which the traffic is sent. You must have the WAN interface(s) already configured in the Broadband screens. Use Gateway IP Address Select this option and enter the IP address of the next-hop gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same segment as your ZyXEL Device's interface(s). The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations. Gateway IP Address If you choose Enable in the Use Gateway IP Address field, enter the IP address of the gateway. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 137 Chapter 9 Static Routing 138 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide CHAPTER 10 Quality of Service (QoS) 10.1 Overview Quality of Service (QoS) refers to both a networks ability to deliver data with minimum delay, and the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth. Without QoS, all traffic data is equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested. This can cause a reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time-critical application such as video-on-
demand. Configure QoS on the ZyXEL Device to group and prioritize application traffic and fine-tune network performance. Setting up QoS involves these steps:
1 2 Configure classifiers to sort traffic into different flows. Assign priority and define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow. The ZyXEL Device assigns each packet a priority and then queues the packet accordingly. Packets assigned a high priority are processed more quickly than those with low priority if there is congestion, allowing time-sensitive applications to flow more smoothly. Time-sensitive applications include both those that require a low level of latency (delay) and a low level of jitter (variations in delay) such as Voice over IP (VoIP) or Internet gaming, and those for which jitter alone is a problem such as Internet radio or streaming video. This chapter contains information about configuring QoS and editing classifiers. 10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The General screen lets you enable or disable QoS and set the upstream bandwidth (Section 10.3 on page 141). The Queue Setup screen lets you configure QoS queue assignment (Section 10.4 on page 143). The Class Setup screen lets you add, edit or delete QoS classifiers (Section 10.5 on page 145). The Policer Setup screen lets you add, edit or delete QoS policers (Section 10.5 on page 145). The Monitor screen lets you view the ZyXEL Device's QoS-related packet statistics (Section 10.7 on page 152). P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 139 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) 10.2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. QoS versus Cos QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the same flow are given the same priority. CoS (class of service) is a way of managing traffic in a network by grouping similar types of traffic together and treating each type as a class. You can use CoS to give different priorities to different packet types. CoS technologies include IEEE 802.1p layer 2 tagging and DiffServ (Differentiated Services or DS). IEEE 802.1p tagging makes use of three bits in the packet header, while DiffServ is a new protocol and defines a new DS field, which replaces the eight-bit ToS (Type of Service) field in the IP header. Tagging and Marking In a QoS class, you can configure whether to add or change the DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) value, IEEE 802.1p priority level and VLAN ID number in a matched packet. When the packet passes through a compatible network, the networking device, such as a backbone switch, can provide specific treatment or service based on the tag or marker. Traffic Shaping Bursty traffic may cause network congestion. Traffic shaping regulates packets to be transmitted with a pre-configured data transmission rate using buffers (or queues). Your ZyXEL Device uses the Token Bucket algorithm to allow a certain amount of large bursts while keeping a limit at the average rate. Traffic Rate Traffic Rate c i f f a r T c i f f a r T Time Time
(Before Traffic Shaping)
(After Traffic Shaping) 140 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Traffic Policing Traffic policing is the limiting of the input or output transmission rate of a class of traffic on the basis of user-defined criteria. Traffic policing methods measure traffic flows against user-defined criteria and identify it as either conforming, exceeding or violating the criteria. Traffic Rate Traffic Rate c i f f a r T c i f f a r T Time Time
(Before Traffic Policing)
(After Traffic Policing) The ZyXEL Device supports three incoming traffic metering algorithms: Token Bucket Filter (TBF), Single Rate Two Color Maker (srTCM), and Two Rate Two Color Marker (trTCM). You can specify actions which are performed on the colored packets. See Section 10.8 on page 153 for more information on each metering algorithm. 10.3 The Quality of Service General Screen Click Network Settings > QoS > General to open the screen as shown next. Use this screen to enable or disable QoS and set the upstream bandwidth. See Section 10.1 on page 139 for more information. Figure 51 Network Settings > QoS > General P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 141 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 33 Network Settings > QoS > General LABEL QoS DESCRIPTION State WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth LAN Managed Downstream Bandwidth Select the Enable check box to turn on QoS to improve your network performance. Enter the amount of upstream bandwidth for the WAN interfaces that you want to allocate using QoS. The recommendation is to set this speed to match the interfaces actual transmission speed. For example, set the WAN interfaces speed to 100000 kbps if your Internet connection has an upstream transmission speed of 100 Mbps. You can set this number higher than the interfaces actual transmission speed. The ZyXEL Device uses up to 95% of the DSL ports actual upstream transmission speed even if you set this number higher than the DSL ports actual transmission speed. You can also set this number lower than the interfaces actual transmission speed. This will cause the ZyXEL Device to not use some of the interfaces available bandwidth. If you leave this field blank, the ZyXEL Device automatically sets this number to be 95% of the WAN interfaces actual upstream transmission speed. Enter the amount of downstream bandwidth for the LAN interfaces (including HPNA and WLAN) that you want to allocate using QoS. The recommendation is to set this speed to match the WAN interfaces actual transmission speed. For example, set the LAN managed downstream bandwidth to 100000 kbps if you use a 100 Mbps wired Ethernet WAN connection. You can also set this number lower than the WAN interfaces actual transmission speed. This will cause the ZyXEL Device to not use some of the interfaces available bandwidth. If you leave this field blank, the ZyXEL Device automatically sets this to the LAN interfaces maximum supported connection speed. Upstream traffic priority Assigned by Select how the ZyXEL Device assigns priorities to various upstream traffic flows. None: Disables auto priority mapping and has the ZyXEL Device put packets into the queues according to your classification rules. Traffic which does not match any of the classification rules is mapped into the default queue with the lowest priority. Ethernet Priority: Automatically assign priority based on the IEEE 802.1p priority level. IP Precedence: Automatically assign priority based on the first three bits of the TOS field in the IP header. Packet Length: Automatically assign priority based on the packet size. Smaller packets get higher priority since control, signaling, VoIP, internet gaming, or other real-time packets are usually small while larger packets are usually best effort data packets like file transfers. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 142 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) 10.4 The Queue Setup Screen Click Network Settings > QoS > Queue Setup to open the screen as shown next. Use this screen to configure QoS queue assignment. Figure 52 Network Settings > QoS > Queue Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 34 Network Settings > QoS > Queue Setup LABEL Add new Queue DESCRIPTION Click this button to create a new queue entry.
Status Name Interface Priority Weight Buffer Management This is the index number of the entry. This field displays whether the queue is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this queue is active. A gray bulb signifies that this queue is not active. This shows the descriptive name of this queue. This shows the name of the ZyXEL Devices interface through which traffic in this queue passes. This shows the priority of this queue. This shows the weight of this queue. This shows the queue management algorithm used for this queue. Queue management algorithms determine how the ZyXEL Device should handle packets when it receives too many (network congestion). P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 143 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 34 Network Settings > QoS > Queue Setup (continued) LABEL Rate Limit DESCRIPTION This shows the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this queue. Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the queue. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing queue. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action. 10.4.1 Adding a QoS Queue Click Add new Queue or the edit icon in the Queue Setup screen to configure a queue. Figure 53 Queue Setup: Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 35 Queue Setup: Add LABEL Active DESCRIPTION Select to enable or disable this queue. Name Enter the descriptive name of this queue. To Interface Select the interface to which this queue is applied. This field is read-only if you are editing the queue. Priority Select the priority level (from 1 to 3) of this queue. The smaller the number, the higher the priority level. Traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets through faster while traffic in lower priority queues is dropped if the network is congested. Weight Select the weight (from 1 to 8) of this queue. If two queues have the same priority level, the ZyXEL Device divides the bandwidth across the queues according to their weights. Queues with larger weights get more bandwidth than queues with smaller weights. Buffer Management This field displays Drop Tail (DT). Drop Tail (DT) is a simple queue management algorithm that allows the ZyXEL Device buffer to accept as many packets as it can until it is full. Once the buffer is full, new packets that arrive are dropped until there is space in the buffer again (packets are transmitted out of it). Rate Limit Specify the maximum transmission rate (in Kbps) allowed for traffic on this queue. 144 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 35 Queue Setup: Add (continued) LABEL Apply DESCRIPTION Click Apply to save your changes. Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 10.5 The Class Setup Screen Use this screen to add, edit or delete QoS classifiers. A classifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address, destination address, source port number, destination port number or incoming interface. For example, you can configure a classifier to select traffic from the same protocol port (such as Telnet) to form a flow. You can give different priorities to traffic that the ZyXEL Device forwards out through the WAN interface. Give high priority to voice and video to make them run more smoothly. Similarly, give low priority to many large file downloads so that they do not reduce the quality of other applications. Click Network Settings > QoS > Class Setup to open the following screen. Figure 54 Network Settings > QoS > Class Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 36 Network Settings > QoS > Class Setup LABEL Add new Classifier DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new classifier.
Status Class Name Classification Criteria DSCP Mark 802.1P Mark VLAN ID Tag This is the index number of the entry. This field displays whether the classifier is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this classifier is active. A gray bulb signifies that this classifier is not active. This is the name of the classifier. This shows criteria specified in this classifier, for example the interface from which traffic of this class should come and the source MAC address of traffic that matches this classifier. This is the DSCP number added to traffic of this classifier. This is the IEEE 802.1p priority level assigned to traffic of this classifier. This is the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic of this classifier. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 145 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 36 Network Settings > QoS > Class Setup (continued) LABEL To Queue DESCRIPTION This is the name of the queue in which traffic of this classifier is put. Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the classifier. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing classifier. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action. 146 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) 10.5.1 Add/Edit QoS Class Click Add new Classifier in the Class Setup screen or the Edit icon next to a classifier to open the following screen. Figure 55 Class Setup: Add/Edit P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 147 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 37 Class Setup: Add/Edit LABEL Active DESCRIPTION Select this to enable this classifier. Class Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 15 printable English keyboard characters, not including spaces. Classification Order Select an existing number for where you want to put this classifier to move the classifier to the number you selected after clicking Apply. Select Last to put this rule in the back of the classifier list. From Interface To Interface If you want to classify the traffic by an ingress interface, select an interface from the From Interface drop-down list box. If you want to classify the traffic by an egress interface, select an interface from the To Interface drop-down list box. Ether Type Select a predefined application to configure a class for the matched traffic. If you select IP, you also need to configure source or destination MAC address, IP address, DHCP options, DSCP value or the protocol type. If you select 802.1Q, you can configure an 802.1p priority level. Source Address Subnet Netmask Port Range MAC MAC Mask Exclude Destination Address Subnet Netmask Port Range MAC MAC Mask Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation. A blank source IP address means any source IP address. Enter the source subnet mask. If you select TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field, select the check box and enter the port number(s) of the source. Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet. Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packets MAC address should match. Enter f for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffics MAC address should match. Enter 0 for the bit(s) of the matched traffics MAC address, which can be of any hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to 00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a MAC address of 00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria. Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier. Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation. A blank source IP address means any source IP address. Enter the source subnet mask. If you select TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field, select the check box and enter the port number(s) of the source. Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet. Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packets MAC address should match. Enter f for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffics MAC address should match. Enter 0 for the bit(s) of the matched traffics MAC address, which can be of any hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to 00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a MAC address of 00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria. 148 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 37 Class Setup: Add/Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier. Exclude Others Service This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. This field simplifies classifier configuration by allowing you to select a predefined application. When you select a predefined application, you do not configure the rest of the filter fields. IP Protocol This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. Select this option and select the protocol (service type) from TCP, UDP, ICMP or IGMP. If you select User defined, enter the protocol (service type) number. DHCP This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. Select this option and select a DHCP option. If you select Vendor Class ID (DHCP Option 60), enter the Vendor Class Identifier (Option 60) of the matched traffic, such as the type of the hardware or firmware. If you select User Class ID (DHCP Option 77), enter a string that identifies the users category or application type in the matched DHCP packets. Packet Length This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. Select this option and enter the minimum and maximum packet length (from 46 to 1500) in the fields provided. DSCP This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. Select this option and specify a DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) number between 0 and 63 in the field provided. 802.1P This field is available only when you select 802.1Q in the Ether Type field. Select this option and select a priority level (between 0 and 7) from the drop-
down list box.
"0" is the lowest priority level and "7" is the highest. VLAN ID This field is available only when you select 802.1Q in the Ether Type field. Select this option and specify a VLAN ID number. TCP ACK This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. If you select this option, the matched TCP packets must contain the ACK
(Acknowledge) flag. Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier. DSCP Mark This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. If you select Mark, enter a DSCP value with which the ZyXEL Device replaces the DSCP field in the packets. If you select Unchange, the ZyXEL Device keep the DSCP field in the packets. 802.1P Mark Select a priority level with which the ZyXEL Device replaces the IEEE 802.1p priority field in the packets. If you select Unchange, the ZyXEL Device keep the 802.1p priority field in the packets. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 149 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 37 Class Setup: Add/Edit (continued) LABEL VLAN ID DESCRIPTION If you select Remark, enter a VLAN ID number with which the ZyXEL Device replaces the VLAN ID of the frames. If you select Remove, the ZyXEL Device deletes the VLAN ID of the frames before forwarding them out. If you select Add, the ZyXEL Device treat all matched traffic untagged and add a second VLAN ID. If you select Unchange, the ZyXEL Device keep the VLAN ID in the packets. To Queue Index Select a queue that applies to this class. You should have configured a queue in the Queue Setup screen already. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 10.6 The QoS Policer Setup Screen Use this screen to configure QoS policers that allow you to limit the transmission rate of incoming traffic. Click Network Settings > QoS > Policer Setup. The screen appears as shown. Figure 56 Network Settings > QoS > Policer Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 38 Network Settings > QoS > Policer Setup LABEL Add new Policer DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new entry.
Status Name This is the index number of the entry. This field displays whether the policer is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this policer is active. A gray bulb signifies that this policer is not active. This field displays the descriptive name of this policer. Regulated Classes This field displays the name of a QoS classifier Meter Type This field displays the type of QoS metering algorithm used in this policer. Rule These are the rates and burst sizes against which the policer checks the traffic of the member QoS classes. 150 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 38 Network Settings > QoS > Policer Setup (continued) LABEL Action DESCRIPTION This shows the how the policer has the ZyXEL Device treat different types of traffic belonging to the policers member QoS classes. Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the policer. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing policer. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action. 10.6.1 Add/Edit a QoS Policer Click Add new Officer in the Policer Setup screen or the Edit icon next to a policer to show the following screen. Figure 57 Policer Setup: Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 39 Policer Setup: Add/Edit LABEL Active DESCRIPTION Select the check box to activate this policer. Name Enter the descriptive name of this policer. Meter Type Select how the policer shapes the traffic of the member QoS classes. The Simple Token Bucket algorithm uses tokens in a bucket to control when traffic can be transmitted. Each token represents one byte. The algorithm allows bursts of up to b bytes which is also the bucket size. The Single Rate Three Color Marker (srTCM) is based on the token bucket filter and identifies packets by comparing them to the Committed Information Rate
(CIR), the Committed Burst Size (CBS) and the Excess Burst Size (EBS). The Two Rate Three Color Marker (trTCM) is based on the token bucket filter and identifies packets by comparing them to the Committed Information Rate (CIR) and the Peak Information Rate (PIR). Committed Rate Specify the committed rate. When the incoming traffic rate of the member QoS classes is less than the committed rate, the device applies the conforming action to the traffic. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 151 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 39 Policer Setup: Add/Edit (continued) LABEL Committed Burst Size DESCRIPTION Specify the committed burst size for packet bursts. This must be equal to or less than the peak burst size (two rate three color) or excess burst size (single rate three color) if it is also configured. This is the maximum size of the (first) token bucket in a traffic metering algorithm. Conforming Action Specify what the ZyXEL Device does for packets within the committed rate and burst size (green-marked packets). Non-
Conforming Action Available Class Selected Class Pass: Send the packets without modification. DSCP Mark: Change the DSCP mark value of the packets. Enter the DSCP mark value to use. Specify what the ZyXEL Device does for packets that exceed the excess burst size or peak rate and burst size (red-marked packets). Drop: Discard the packets. DSCP Mark: Change the DSCP mark value of the packets. Enter the DSCP mark value to use. The packets may be dropped if there is congestion on the network. Select a QoS classifier to apply this QoS policer to traffic that matches the QoS classifier. Highlight a QoS classifier in the Available Class box and use the > button to move it to the Selected Class box. To remove a QoS classifier from the Selected Class box, select it and use the <
button. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 10.7 The QoS Monitor Screen To view the ZyXEL Devices QoS packet statistics, click Network Settings > QoS > Monitor. The screen appears as shown. Figure 58 Network Settings > QoS > Monitor 152 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 40 Network Settings > QoS > Monitor LABEL Refresh Interval DESCRIPTION Enter how often you want the ZyXEL Device to update this screen. Select None to stop refreshing statistics. Interface Monitor
Name Pass Rate This is the index number of the entry. This shows the name of the interface on the ZyXEL Device. This shows how many packets forwarded to this interface are transmitted successfully. Drop Rate This shows how many packets forwarded to this interface are dropped. Queue Monitor
Name Pass Rate This is the index number of the entry. This shows the name of the queue. This shows how many packets assigned to this queue are transmitted successfully. Drop Rate This shows how many packets assigned to this queue are dropped. 10.8 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the ZyXEL Device features described in this chapter. IEEE 802.1Q Tag The IEEE 802.1Q standard defines an explicit VLAN tag in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges. A VLAN tag includes the 12-bit VLAN ID and 3-bit user priority. The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that devices need to process the frame across the network. IEEE 802.1p specifies the user priority field and defines up to eight separate traffic types. The following table describes the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802.1d standard (which incorporates the 802.1p). Table 41 IEEE 802.1p Priority Level and Traffic Type PRIORITY LEVEL Level 7 TRAFFIC TYPE Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages. Level 6 Level 5 Level 4 Level 3 Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter (jitter is the variations in delay). Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter. Typically used for controlled load, latency-sensitive traffic such as SNA (Systems Network Architecture) transactions. Typically used for excellent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay. Level 2 This is for spare bandwidth. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 153 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 41 IEEE 802.1p Priority Level and Traffic Type (continued) PRIORITY LEVEL Level 1 TRAFFIC TYPE This is typically used for non-critical background traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users. Level 0 Typically used for best-effort traffic. DiffServ QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the flow are given the same priority. You can use CoS (class of service) to give different priorities to different packet types. DiffServ (Differentiated Services) is a class of service (CoS) model that marks packets so that they receive specific per-hop treatment at DiffServ-compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow. Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points (DSCPs) indicating the level of service desired. This allows the intermediary DiffServ-compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow. In addition, applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going. DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new Differentiated Services (DS) field to replace the Type of Service (TOS) field in the IP header. The DS field contains a 2-bit unused field and a 6-bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels. The following figure illustrates the DS field. DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non-DiffServ compliant, ToS-enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping. DSCP (6 bits) Unused (2 bits) The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior, the PHB (Per-Hop Behavior), that each packet gets across the DiffServ network. Based on the marking rule, different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding. Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies. IP Precedence Similar to IEEE 802.1p prioritization at layer-2, you can use IP precedence to prioritize packets in a layer-3 network. IP precedence uses three bits of the eight-bit ToS (Type of Service) field in the IP header. There are eight classes of services (ranging from zero to seven) in IP precedence. Zero is the lowest priority level and seven is the highest. Automatic Priority Queue Assignment If you enable QoS on the ZyXEL Device, the ZyXEL Device can automatically base on the IEEE 802.1p priority level, IP precedence and/or packet length to assign priority to traffic which does not match a class. 154 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) The following table shows you the internal layer-2 and layer-3 QoS mapping on the ZyXEL Device. On the ZyXEL Device, traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested. Table 42 Internal Layer2 and Layer3 QoS Mapping PRIORITY QUEUE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 LAYER 2 IEEE 802.1P USER PRIORITY
(ETHERNET PRIORITY) 1 2 0 3 4 5 6 7 LAYER 3 TOS (IP PRECEDENCE) DSCP IP PACKET LENGTH (BYTE)
>1100 250~1100
<250 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 000000 000000 001110 001100 001010 001000 010110 010100 010010 010000 011110 011100 011010 011000 100110 100100 100010 100000 101110 101000 110000 111000 Token Bucket The token bucket algorithm uses tokens in a bucket to control when traffic can be transmitted. The bucket stores tokens, each of which represents one byte. The algorithm allows bursts of up to b bytes which is also the bucket size, so the bucket can hold up to b tokens. Tokens are generated and added into the bucket at a constant rate. The following shows how tokens work with packets:
A packet can be transmitted if the number of tokens in the bucket is equal to or greater than the size of the packet (in bytes). After a packet is transmitted, a number of tokens corresponding to the packet size is removed from the bucket. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 155 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) If there are no tokens in the bucket, the ZyXEL Device stops transmitting until enough tokens are generated. If not enough tokens are available, the ZyXEL Device treats the packet in either one of the following ways:
In traffic shaping:
Holds it in the queue until enough tokens are available in the bucket. In traffic policing:
Drops it. Transmits it but adds a DSCP mark. The ZyXEL Device may drop these marked packets if the network is overloaded. Configure the bucket size to be equal to or less than the amount of the bandwidth that the interface can support. It does not help if you set it to a bucket size over the interfaces capability. The smaller the bucket size, the lower the data transmission rate and that may cause outgoing packets to be dropped. A larger transmission rate requires a big bucket size. For example, use a bucket size of 10 kbytes to get the transmission rate up to 10 Mbps. Single Rate Three Color Marker The Single Rate Three Color Marker (srTCM, defined in RFC 2697) is a type of traffic policing that identifies packets by comparing them to one user-defined rate, the Committed Information Rate
(CIR), and two burst sizes: the Committed Burst Size (CBS) and Excess Burst Size (EBS). The srTCM evaluates incoming packets and marks them with one of three colors which refer to packet loss priority levels. High packet loss priority level is referred to as red, medium is referred to as yellow and low is referred to as green. The srTCM is based on the token bucket filter and has two token buckets (CBS and EBS). Tokens are generated and added into the bucket at a constant rate, called Committed Information Rate
(CIR). When the first bucket (CBS) is full, new tokens overflow into the second bucket (EBS). All packets are evaluated against the CBS. If a packet does not exceed the CBS it is marked green. Otherwise it is evaluated against the EBS. If it is below the EBS then it is marked yellow. If it exceeds the EBS then it is marked red. The following shows how tokens work with incoming packets in srTCM:
A packet arrives. The packet is marked green and can be transmitted if the number of tokens in the CBS bucket is equal to or greater than the size of the packet (in bytes). After a packet is transmitted, a number of tokens corresponding to the packet size is removed from the CBS bucket. If there are not enough tokens in the CBS bucket, the ZyXEL Device checks the EBS bucket. The packet is marked yellow if there are sufficient tokens in the EBS bucket. Otherwise, the packet is marked red. No tokens are removed if the packet is dropped. Two Rate Three Color Marker The Two Rate Three Color Marker (trTCM, defined in RFC 2698) is a type of traffic policing that identifies packets by comparing them to two user-defined rates: the Committed Information Rate
(CIR) and the Peak Information Rate (PIR). The CIR specifies the average rate at which packets are admitted to the network. The PIR is greater than or equal to the CIR. CIR and PIR values are based 156 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) on the guaranteed and maximum bandwidth respectively as negotiated between a service provider and client. The trTCM evaluates incoming packets and marks them with one of three colors which refer to packet loss priority levels. High packet loss priority level is referred to as red, medium is referred to as yellow and low is referred to as green. The trTCM is based on the token bucket filter and has two token buckets (Committed Burst Size
(CBS) and Peak Burst Size (PBS)). Tokens are generated and added into the two buckets at the CIR and PIR respectively. All packets are evaluated against the PIR. If a packet exceeds the PIR it is marked red. Otherwise it is evaluated against the CIR. If it exceeds the CIR then it is marked yellow. Finally, if it is below the CIR then it is marked green. The following shows how tokens work with incoming packets in trTCM:
A packet arrives. If the number of tokens in the PBS bucket is less than the size of the packet (in bytes), the packet is marked red and may be dropped regardless of the CBS bucket. No tokens are removed if the packet is dropped. If the PBS bucket has enough tokens, the ZyXEL Device checks the CBS bucket. The packet is marked green and can be transmitted if the number of tokens in the CBS bucket is equal to or greater than the size of the packet (in bytes). Otherwise, the packet is marked yellow. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 157 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) 158 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide CHAPTER 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) 11.1 Overview This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the ZyXEL Device. NAT (Network Address Translation - NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet, for example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network to a different IP address known within another network. 11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Port Forwarding screen to configure forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network (Section 11.2 on page 160). Use the Applications screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network (Section 11.3 on page 163). Use the Port Triggering screen to add and configure the ZyXEL Devices trigger port settings
(Section 11.4 on page 164). Use the DMZ screen to configure a default server (Section 11.5 on page 167). Use the ALG screen to enable and disable the SIP (VoIP) ALG in the ZyXEL Device (Section 11.6 on page 168). Use the Sessions screen to limit the number of concurrent NAT sessions all clients can use
(Section 11.7 on page 169). 11.1.2 What You Need To Know Inside/Outside Inside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the ZyXEL Device, for example, the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts. Global/Local Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side. NAT In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber
(the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 159 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host. Port Forwarding A port forwarding set is a list of inside (behind NAT on the LAN) servers, for example, web or FTP, that you can make visible to the outside world even though NAT makes your whole inside network appear as a single computer to the outside world. Finding Out More See Section 11.8 on page 169 for advanced technical information on NAT. 11.2 The Port Forwarding Screen Use the Port Forwarding screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network. You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded, and the local IP address of the desired server. The port number identifies a service; for example, web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21. In some cases, such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service (for example both FTP and web service), it might be better to specify a range of port numbers. You can allocate a server IP address that corresponds to a port or a range of ports. The most often used port numbers and services are shown in Appendix E on page 333. Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers. Note: Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes (such as a Web or FTP server) from your location. Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location. If you are unsure, refer to your ISP. Configuring Servers Behind Port Forwarding (Example) Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example), port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a 160 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address. The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet. Figure 59 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example A=192.168.1.33 LAN B=192.168.1.34 WAN 192.168.1.1 IP Address assigned by ISP C=192.168.1.3 D=192.168.1.36 Click Network Settings > NAT > Port Forwarding to open the following screen. See Appendix E on page 333 for port numbers commonly used for particular services. Figure 60 Network Settings > NAT > Port Forwarding The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 43 Network Settings > NAT > Port Forwarding LABEL Add new rule DESCRIPTION Click this to add a new rule.
Status This is the index number of the entry. This field displays whether the NAT rule is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this rule is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active. Service Name This shows the services name. WAN Interface This shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded. External Start Port This is the first external port number that identifies a service. External End Port This is the last external port number that identifies a service. Internal Start Port This is the first internal port number that identifies a service. Internal End Port This is the last internal port number that identifies a service. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 161 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) Table 43 Network Settings > NAT > Port Forwarding (continued) LABEL Server IP Address This is the servers IP address. DESCRIPTION Modify Click the Edit icon to edit this rule. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. 11.2.1 Add/Edit Port Forwarding Click Add new rule in the Port Forwarding screen or click the Edit icon next to an existing rule to open the following screen. Figure 61 Port Forwarding: Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 44 Port Forwarding: Add/Edit LABEL Active DESCRIPTION Clear the check box to disable the rule. Select the check box to enable it. This field is read-only in the Port Forwarding Configuration screen. Service Name Enter a name to identify this rule using keyboard characters (A-Z, a-z, 1-2 and so on). This field is read-only in the Port Forwarding Edit screen. WAN Interface Select the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded. External Start Port You must have already configured a WAN connection with NAT enabled. Enter the original destination port for the packets. To forward only one port, enter the port number again in the External End Port field. To forward a series of ports, enter the start port number here and the end port number in the External End Port field. 162 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) Table 44 Port Forwarding: Add/Edit (continued) LABEL External End Port DESCRIPTION Enter the last port of the original destination port range. To forward only one port, enter the port number in the External Start Port field above and then enter it again in this field. To forward a series of ports, enter the last port number in a series that begins with the port number in the External Start Port field above. Internal Start Port This shows the port number to which you want the ZyXEL Device to translate the incoming port. For a range of ports, enter the first number of the range to which you want the incoming ports translated. Internal End Port This shows the last port of the translated port range. Server IP Address Protocol Apply Cancel Enter the inside IP address of the virtual server here. Select the protocol supported by this virtual server. Choices are TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 11.3 The Applications Screen This screen provides a summary of all NAT applications and their configuration. In addition, this screen allows you to create new applications and/or remove existing ones. To access this screen, click Network Settings > NAT > Applications. The following screen appears. Figure 62 Network Settings > NAT > Applications The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 45 Network Settings > NAT > Applications LABEL Add new application DESCRIPTION Click this to add a new NAT application rule. Application Forwarded This field shows the type of application that the service forwards. WAN Interface This field shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded. Server IP Address Modify This field displays the destination IP address for the service. Click the Delete icon to delete the rule. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 163 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) 11.3.1 Add New Application This screen lets you create new NAT application rules. Click Add new application in the Applications screen to open the following screen. Figure 63 Applications: Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 46 Applications: Add LABEL WAN Interface DESCRIPTION Select the WAN interface that you want to apply this NAT rule to. Server IP Address Application Category Application Forwarded View Rule Apply Cancel Enter the inside IP address of the application here. Select the category of the application from the drop-down list box. Select a service from the drop-down list box and the ZyXEL Device automatically configures the protocol, start, end, and map port number that define the service. Click this to display the configuration of the service that you have chosen in Application Fowarded. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 11.4 The Port Triggering Screen Some services use a dedicated range of ports on the client side and a dedicated range of ports on the server side. With regular port forwarding you set a forwarding port in NAT to forward a service
(coming in from the server on the WAN) to the IP address of a computer on the client side (LAN). The problem is that port forwarding only forwards a service to a single LAN IP address. In order to use the same service on a different LAN computer, you have to manually replace the LAN computer's IP address in the forwarding port with another LAN computer's IP address. Trigger port forwarding solves this problem by allowing computers on the LAN to dynamically take turns using the service. The ZyXEL Device records the IP address of a LAN computer that sends traffic to the WAN to request a service with a specific port number and protocol (a "trigger" port). When the ZyXEL Device's WAN port receives a response with a specific port number and protocol
("open" port), the ZyXEL Device forwards the traffic to the LAN IP address of the computer that sent the request. After that computers connection for that service closes, another computer on the 164 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) LAN can use the service in the same manner. This way you do not need to configure a new IP address each time you want a different LAN computer to use the application. For example:
Figure 64 Trigger Port Forwarding Process: Example 1 2 3 4 Jane requests a file from the Real Audio server (port 7070). Port 7070 is a trigger port and causes the ZyXEL Device to record Janes computer IP address. The ZyXEL Device associates Jane's computer IP address with the "open" port range of 6970-7170. The Real Audio server responds using a port number ranging between 6970-7170. The ZyXEL Device forwards the traffic to Janes computer IP address. 5 Only Jane can connect to the Real Audio server until the connection is closed or times out. The ZyXEL Device times out in three minutes with UDP (User Datagram Protocol) or two hours with TCP/IP (Transfer Control Protocol/Internet Protocol). Click Network Settings > NAT > Port Triggering to open the following screen. Use this screen to view your ZyXEL Devices trigger port settings. Figure 65 Network Settings > NAT > Port Triggering The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 47 Network Settings > NAT > Port Triggering LABEL Add new rule DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new rule.
Status This is the index number of the entry. This field displays whether the port triggering rule is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this rule is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active. Service Name This field displays the name of the service used by this rule. WAN Interface This field shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 165 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) Table 47 Network Settings > NAT > Port Triggering (continued) LABEL Trigger Port DESCRIPTION The trigger port is a port (or a range of ports) that causes (or triggers) the ZyXEL Device to record the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN. Start End This is the first port number that identifies a service. This is the last port number that identifies a service. Trigger Proto. This is the trigger transport layer protocol. Open The open port is a port (or a range of ports) that a server on the WAN uses when it sends out a particular service. The ZyXEL Device forwards the traffic with this port (or range of ports) to the client computer on the LAN that requested the service. Start End This is the first port number that identifies a service. This is the last port number that identifies a service. Open Proto. This is the open transport layer protocol. Modify Click the Edit icon to edit this rule. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. 11.4.1 Add/Edit Port Triggering Rule This screen lets you create new port triggering rules. Click Add new rule in the Port Triggering screen or click a rules Edit icon to open the following screen. Figure 66 Port Triggering: Add/Edit 166 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 48 Port Triggering: Configuration Add/Edit LABEL Active DESCRIPTION Select the check box to enable this rule. This field is read-only in the Port Triggering Configuration screen. Service Name Enter a name to identify this rule using keyboard characters (A-Z, a-z, 1-2 and so on). This field is read-only in the Port Triggering Edit screen. WAN Interface Select a WAN interface for which you want to configure port triggering rules. Trigger Start Port The trigger port is a port (or a range of ports) that causes (or triggers) the ZyXEL Device to record the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN. Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers. Trigger End Port Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers. Trigger Protocol Select the transport layer protocol from TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP. Open Start Port The open port is a port (or a range of ports) that a server on the WAN uses when it sends out a particular service. The ZyXEL Device forwards the traffic with this port (or range of ports) to the client computer on the LAN that requested the service. Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers. Open End Port Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers. Open Protocol Select the transport layer protocol from TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 11.5 The DMZ Screen In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server IP address. A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding Setup screen. Figure 67 Network Settings > NAT > DMZ P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 167 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 49 Network Settings > NAT > DMZ LABEL Default Server Address DESCRIPTION Enter the IP address of the default server which receives packets from ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding screen. Note: If you do not assign a Default Server Address, the ZyXEL Device discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding screen. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 11.6 The ALG Screen Some NAT routers may include a SIP Application Layer Gateway (ALG). A SIP ALG allows SIP calls to pass through NAT by examining and translating IP addresses embedded in the data stream. When the ZyXEL Device registers with the SIP register server, the SIP ALG translates the ZyXEL Devices private IP address inside the SIP data stream to a public IP address. You do not need to use STUN or an outbound proxy if your ZyXEL Device is behind a SIP ALG. Use this screen to enable and disable the SIP (VoIP) ALG in the ZyXEL Device. To access this screen, click Network Settings > NAT > ALG. Figure 68 Network Settings > NAT > ALG The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 50 Network Settings > NAT > ALG LABEL ALG DESCRIPTION Enable this to make sure applications such as FTP and file transfer in IM applications work correctly with port-forwarding and address-mapping rules. SIP ALG Apply Cancel Enable this to make sure SIP (VoIP) works correctly with port-forwarding and address-mapping rules. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 168 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) 11.7 The Sessions Screen Use the Sessions screen to limit the number of concurrent NAT sessions all clients can use. Click Network Settings > NAT > Sessions to display the following screen. Figure 69 Network Settings > NAT > Sessions The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 51 Network Settings > NAT > Sessions LABEL MAX NAT Session per Host DESCRIPTION Use this field to set a common limit to the number of concurrent NAT sessions all client computers can have. If only a few clients use peer to peer applications, you can raise this number to improve their performance. With heavy peer to peer application use, lower this number to ensure no single client uses too many of the available NAT sessions. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 11.8 Technical Reference This part contains more information regarding NAT. 11.8.1 NAT Definitions Inside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the ZyXEL Device, for example, the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts. Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 169 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) Note that inside/outside refers to the location of a host, while global/local refers to the IP address of a host used in a packet. Thus, an inside local address (ILA) is the IP address of an inside host in a packet when the packet is still in the local network, while an inside global address (IGA) is the IP address of the same inside host when the packet is on the WAN side. The following table summarizes this information. Table 52 NAT Definitions ITEM Inside DESCRIPTION This refers to the host on the LAN. Outside This refers to the host on the WAN. Local Global This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the LAN. This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the WAN. NAT never changes the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host. 11.8.2 What NAT Does In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber
(the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host. Note that the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host is never changed. The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP. In addition, you can designate servers, for example, a web server and a telnet server, on your local network and make them accessible to the outside world. If you do not define any servers (for Many-
to-One and Many-to-Many Overload mapping), NAT offers the additional benefit of firewall protection. With no servers defined, your ZyXEL Device filters out all incoming inquiries, thus preventing intruders from probing your network. For more information on IP address translation, refer to RFC 1631, The IP Network Address Translator (NAT). 170 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 11.8.3 How NAT Works Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) Each packet has two addresses a source address and a destination address. For outgoing packets, the ILA (Inside Local Address) is the source address on the LAN, and the IGA (Inside Global Address) is the source address on the WAN. For incoming packets, the ILA is the destination address on the LAN, and the IGA is the destination address on the WAN. NAT maps private (local) IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks. It replaces the original IP source address (and TCP or UDP source port numbers for Many-to-One and Many-to-Many Overload NAT mapping) in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet. The ZyXEL Device keeps track of the original addresses and port numbers so incoming reply packets can have their original values restored. The following figure illustrates this. Figure 70 How NAT Works LAN 192.168.1.13 192.168.1.12 SA 192.168.1.10 WAN NAT Table Inside Local IP Address 192.168.1.10 192.168.1.11 192.168.1.12 192.168.1.13 Inside Global IP Address IGA 1 IGA 2 IGA 3 IGA 4 SA IGA1 Inside Local Address (ILA) Inside Global Address (IGA) 192.168.1.11 192.168.1.10 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 171 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) 11.8.4 NAT Application The following figure illustrates a possible NAT application, where three inside LANs (logical LANs using IP alias) behind the ZyXEL Device can communicate with three distinct WAN networks. Figure 71 NAT Application With IP Alias Port Forwarding: Services and Port Numbers The most often used port numbers are shown in the following table. Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers. Please also refer to the Supporting CD for more examples and details on port forwarding and NAT. Table 53 Services and Port Numbers SERVICES ECHO FTP (File Transfer Protocol) SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) DNS (Domain Name System) Finger HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer protocol or WWW, Web) POP3 (Post Office Protocol) NNTP (Network News Transport Protocol) SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) SNMP trap PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) PORT NUMBER 7 21 25 53 79 80 110 119 161 162 1723 172 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) Port Forwarding Example Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example), port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address. The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet. Figure 72 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example A=192.168.1.33 192.168.1.1 B=192.168.1.34 C=192.168.1.35 D=192.168.1.36 IP address assigned by ISP P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 173 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) 174 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide CHAPTER 12 Dynamic DNS Setup 12.1 Overview DNS DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a machine before you can access it. In addition to the system DNS server(s), each WAN interface (service) is set to have its own static or dynamic DNS server list. You can configure a DNS static route to forward DNS queries for certain domain names through a specific WAN interface to its DNS server(s). The ZyXEL Device uses a system DNS server (in the order you specify in the Broadband screen) to resolve domain names that do not match any DNS routing entry. After the ZyXEL Device receives a DNS reply from a DNS server, it creates a new entry for the resolved IP address in the routing table. In the following example, the DNS server 168.92.5.1 obtained from the WAN interface eth10.0 is set to be the system DNS server. The DNS server 10.10.23.7 is obtained from the WAN interface VDSL_PoE/ppp0.1. You configure a DNS route for *example.com to have the ZyXEL Device forward DNS requests for the domain name mail.example.com through the WAN interface VDSL_PoE/
ppp0.1 to the DNS server 10.10.23.7. Figure 73 Example of DNS Routing Topology LAN WAN eth10.0 DNS:168.92.5.1
(Default) VDSL_PPoE/ppp0.1 sip.service.com mail.example.com DNS:10.10.23.7 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 175 Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS Setup Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you (in NetMeeting, CU-SeeMe, etc.). You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name (for instance myhost.dhs.org, where myhost is a name of your choice) that will never change instead of using an IP address that changes each time you reconnect. Your friends or relatives will always be able to call you even if they don't know your IP address. First of all, you need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with www.dyndns.org. This is for people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP server that would still like to have a domain name. The Dynamic DNS service provider will give you a password or key. 12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the DNS Entry screen to view, configure, or remove DNS routes (Section 12.2 on page 176). Use the Dynamic DNS screen to enable DDNS and configure the DDNS settings on the ZyXEL Device (Section 12.3 on page 178). 12.1.2 What You Need To Know DYNDNS Wildcard Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes *.yourhost.dyndns.org to be aliased to the same IP address as yourhost.dyndns.org. This feature is useful if you want to be able to use, for example, www.yourhost.dyndns.org and still reach your hostname. If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use Dynamic DNS. 12.2 The DNS Entry Screen Use this screen to view and configure DNS routes on the ZyXEL Device. Click Advanced > DNS Setting to open the DNS Entry screen. Figure 74 Advanced > DNS Setting > DNS Setting 176 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS Setup The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 54 Advanced > DNS Setting > DNS Setting LABEL Add new DNS entry DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new DNS entry.
Hostname IP Address Source Modify This is the index number of the entry. This indicates the host name or domain name. This indicates the IP address assigned to this computer. This indicates the source of the IP address. Click the Edit icon to edit the rule. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. 12.2.1 Add/Edit DNS Entry You can manually add or edit the ZyXEL Devices DNS name and IP address entry. Click Add new DNS entry in the DNS Entry screen or the Edit icon next to the entry you want to edit. The screen shown next appears. Figure 75 DNS Entry: Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 55 DNS Entry: Add/Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Enter the host name of the DNS entry. Host Name IP Address Enter the IP address of the DNS entry. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 177 Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS Setup 12.3 The Dynamic DNS Screen Use this screen to change your ZyXEL Devices DDNS. Click Advanced > DNS Setting > Dynamic DNS. The screen appears as shown. Figure 76 Advanced > DNS Setting > Dynamic DNS The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 56 Advanced > DNS Setting > Dynamic DNS LABEL Dynamic DNS DESCRIPTION Select this check box to use dynamic DNS. Service Provider Select your Dynamic DNS service provider from the drop-down list box. Hostname Type the domain name assigned to your ZyXEL Device by your Dynamic DNS provider. You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma (","). User Name Password Type your user name. Type the password assigned to you. Email Key Apply Cancel If you select TZO in the Service Provider field, enter the user name you used to register for this service. If you select TZO in the Service Provider field, enter the password you used to register for this service. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 178 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide CHAPTER 13 IGMP 13.1 Overview Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender to 1 recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender to everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to just a group of hosts on the network. IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. See RFC 1112, RFC 2236, and RFC 3376 for information on IGMP versions 1, 2, and 3 respectively. 13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the General screen to configure general IGMP proxy and IGMP packet processing settings
(Section 13.2 on page 181). Use the IGMP Filter screens to control IGMP access (Section 13.3 on page 182). Use the IGMP ACL screens to block or allow access to specific multicast media channels (Section 13.4 on page 186). 13.1.2 What You Need to Know IP Multicast Addresses In IPv4, a multicast address allows a device to send packets to a specific group of hosts (multicast group) in a different sub-network. A multicast IP address represents a traffic receiving group, not individual receiving devices. IP addresses in the Class D range (224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255) are used for IP multicasting. Certain IP multicast numbers are reserved by IANA for special purposes
(see the IANA web site for more information). IGMP Snooping A layer-2 switch can passively snoop on IGMP Query, Report and Leave (IGMP version 2) packets transferred between IP multicast routers/switches and IP multicast hosts to learn the IP multicast group membership. It checks IGMP packets passing through it, picks out the group registration information, and configures multicasting accordingly. IGMP snooping allows the ZyXEL Device to learn multicast groups without you having to manually configure them. The ZyXEL Device forwards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups (that it has learned from IGMP snooping or that you have manually configured) to ports that are members of that group. The ZyXEL Device discards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups that it does not know. IGMP snooping generates no additional network traffic, allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your device. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 179 Chapter 13 IGMP IGMP Proxy To allow better network performance, you can use IGMP proxy instead of a multicast routing protocol in a simple tree network topology. Note: Your ZyXEL Device is an IGMP proxy. In IGMP proxy, an upstream interface is the port that is closer to the source (or the root of the multicast tree) and is able to receive multicast traffic. There should only be one upstream interface
(also known as the query port) for one query VLAN on the ZyXEL Device. A downstream interface is a port that connects to a host (such as a computer). The following figure shows a network example where A is the multicast source while computers 1, 2 and 3 are the receivers. In the figure A is connected to the upstream interface and 1, 2 and 3 are connected to the downstream interface. Figure 77 IGMP Proxy Network Example Multicast Server Proxy Hosts The ZyXEL Device will not respond to IGMP join and leave messages on the upstream interface. The ZyXEL Device only responds to IGMP query messages on the upstream interface. The ZyXEL Device sends IGMP query messages to the hosts that are members of the query VLAN. The ZyXEL Device only sends an IGMP leave message via the upstream interface when the last host leaves a multicast group. Router Alert Option The router alert option provides a way to let routers intercept packets not addressed to them directly, without incurring any significant performance penalty. The router alert option in the IP header of an IGMP control packet tells the router to examine the packet more closely for routing information. Regular data packets do not receive the extra checking and are forwarded with little or no performance penalty. IGMP v2 and IGMP v3 both require the router alert option while IGMP v1 does not use it at all. See RFC 2113 for more information. 180 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 13 IGMP 13.2 The IGMP General Screen Use the General screen to configure general IGMP proxy and IGMP packet processing settings. Click Network Settings > IGMP Setting > General to open the following screen. Figure 78 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > General The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 57 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > General LABEL IGMP Proxy State DESCRIPTION Query Interval Specify how many seconds since the last query the ZyXEL Device waits before it queries all directly connected networks to gather multicast group membership. Query Response Interval Specify how many seconds the host allots for gathering membership information from directly connected networks before it sends a report. Robustness Value This is the number of times the host sends a report to the ZyXEL Device when the ZyXEL Device queries for the hosts status. IGMP Packet Process Select one or more of these fields to increase the IGMP networks security or control which types of IGMP packets the ZyXEL Device forwards. Ignore IGMP packets not from LAN subnet Ignore IGMP report without router alert option Ignore IGMP leave without router alert option Ignore IGMP query without router alert option Select this to discard IGMP packets from IP addresses other than the LAN subnet. Select this to discard IGMP report packets that do not include a router alert option. Select this to discard IGMP leave packets that do not include a router alert option. Select this to discard IGMP query packets that do not include a router alert option. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 181 Chapter 13 IGMP Table 57 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > General (continued) LABEL Ignore IGMP query which destination IP is not 224.0.0.1 DESCRIPTION Select this to discard IGMP query packets with a destination IP address other than 224.0.0.1, the all-hosts multicast address. Apply Cancel Click this button to save your settings back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 13.3 IGMP Filter Configuration Use this screen to control IGMP access. Click Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP Filter to open the following screen. Figure 79 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP Filter 182 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 13 IGMP The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 58 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP Filter LABEL Allow IGMP packets from Ethernet interface DESCRIPTION Select this to accept IGMP packets received on any of the LAN Ethernet ports. Clear this to discard IGMP packets received on any of the LAN Ethernet ports. Allow IGMP packets from WiFi interface Select this to accept IGMP packets received through the wireless LAN interface. Clear this to discard IGMP packets received through the wireless LAN interface. Allow IGMP packets from Ethernet LAN port1 ~ 4 Select specific LAN Ethernet ports upon which to accept IGMP packets. Clear individual LAN Ethernet port options to discard IGMP packets received on those ports. LAN Host LAN Host IP Type IGMP Enabled Max Allowed Channel Modify This table lists the LAN computers the ZyXEL Device has detected. This is the IP address of a computer on the ZyXEL Devices LAN. This shows whether or not the LAN device is a Set Top Box (STB). This shows whether or not the LAN device is allowed to access IGMP services through the ZyXEL Device. This is how many IGMP channels the LAN device is allowed to subscribe to. Click the Edit icon to change the entry. Multicast Service Use this section to limit access to IGMP multicast service domains. Add a new service Click this to add a new IGMP multicast service domain. Service Name This is the name of an IGMP multicast service domain. Multicast Group This is the multicast address and subnet that the service domain uses. STB Max Channels This is to how many of the service domains IGMP channels a LAN STB device is allowed to subscribe. Non-STB Max Channels This is to how many of the service domains IGMP channels LAN devices other than STBs are allowed to subscribe. Modify Click the Edit icon to change the entry. Add a new host limitation Click the Delete icon to delete the entry. Click this to limit a LAN hosts IGMP access. Service Name This is the name of an IGMP multicast service domain. LAN IP This is the IP address of a computer on the ZyXEL Devices LAN. IGMP Enabled Max Allowed Channel Modify Apply Cancel This shows whether or not the LAN device using the specified IP address is allowed to use the IGMP multicast service domain. This shows to how many of the IGMP multicast service domains channels the LAN device using the specified IP address can subscribe. Click the Edit icon to change the entry. Click the Delete icon to delete the entry. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 183 Chapter 13 IGMP 13.3.1 IGMP Host Limitation Edit Use this screen to control a LAN hosts access to IGMP services through the ZyXEL Device. Click Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP Filter and then a LAN hosts Edit icon to open the following screen. Figure 80 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP Filter > LAN Host Edit The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 59 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP Filter > LAN Host Edit LABEL LAN Host DESCRIPTION This is the IP address of one of the ZyXEL Devices LAN hosts. IGMP Enabled Max Allowed Channels Apply Cancel Select whether or not the LAN device using the specified IP address is allowed to access IGMP services through the ZyXEL Device. Specify to how many IGMP channels the LAN device is allowed to subscribe. Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 13.3.2 IGMP Service Add Use this screen to add or edit an IGMP multicast service domain. Click Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP Filter > Add a new rule to open the following screen. Figure 81 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP Filter > Add a new service 184 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 13 IGMP The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 60 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP Filter > Add a new service LABEL Service Name DESCRIPTION Specify a name to identify the IGMP service domain. You can enter up to 30 characters. You can use letters, numbers, hyphens (-) and underscores (_). Spaces are not allowed. Maximum active channels for STB Specify to how many of the service domains IGMP channels a LAN STB device is allowed to subscribe. Maximum active channels for Non-
STB Group List Specify to how many of the service domains IGMP channels LAN devices other than STBs are is allowed to subscribe. Use this section to specify the multicast groups and subnet masks for this IGMP service domain. Add a group Click this to add a multicast group and subnet mask to this IGMP service domain. Group Modify Apply Cancel This column lists the multicast groups and subnet masks for this IGMP service domain. Click the Delete icon to delete the entry. Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 13.3.3 IGMP Host Limitation Add Use this screen to control a LAN hosts access to an IGMP multicast service domain. Click Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP Filter > Add a new host limitation to open the following screen. Figure 82 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP Filter > Add a new host limitation The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 61 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP Filter > Add a new host limitation LABEL Service DESCRIPTION Specify the name of the IGMP multicast service domain to which you want to block or allow access. LAN Host Select the IP address of one of the ZyXEL Devices LAN hosts. IGMP Enabled Select whether or not the LAN device using the specified IP address is allowed to use the IGMP multicast service domain. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 185 Chapter 13 IGMP Table 61 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP Filter > Add a new host limitation (continued) LABEL Max Allowed Channels DESCRIPTION This shows to how many of the IGMP multicast service domains channels the LAN device using the specified IP address can subscribe. IGMP Enabled Max Allowed Channels Apply Cancel Select whether or not the LAN device is allowed to access IGMP services through the ZyXEL Device. Specify to how many IGMP channels the LAN device is allowed to subscribe. Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 13.4 IGMP ACL Configuration Use the IGMP Access Control List (ACL) to block or allow access to specific multicast media channels. Click Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP ACL to open the following screen. Figure 83 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP ACL The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 62 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP ACL LABEL IGMP ACL List DESCRIPTION Select Black List to block access to specific multicast channels and allow access to other multicast channels. Select White List to allow access to only specific multicast channels and block access to other multicast channels. Select Disabled to have the ZyXEL Device not restrict which multicast channels the multimedia devices on the LAN can access. Add a new rule Click this to create a new IGMP ACL rule. White List These rules are for allowing access to specified multicast IP addresses. Multicast Address This is the multicast IP address of a multicast media channel to which you want to allow access. 186 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 13 IGMP Table 62 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP ACL (continued) LABEL Multicast Address Mask DESCRIPTION This is the subnet mask of the multicast IP address. Black List These rules are for blocking access to specific multicast IP addresses. Multicast Address This is the multicast IP address of a multicast media channel to which you want to block access. Multicast Address Mask This is the subnet mask of the multicast IP address. Modify Click the Edit icon to change the entry. Apply Cancel Click the Delete icon to delete the entry. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 13.4.1 IGMP ACL Add Use this screen to configure the multicast IP address of a multicast media channel to which you want to block or allow access. Click Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP ACL > Add a new rule to open the following screen. Figure 84 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP ACL > Add a new rule The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 63 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP ACL > Add a new rule LABEL Multicast IP Address DESCRIPTION Enter the multicast IP address of a multicast media channel to which you want to block or allow access. Multicast IP Mask Enter the subnet mask of the multicast IP address. Type Apply Cancel Select Black List to have this entry block access to the specified multicast IP address. Select White List to have this entry allow access to the specified multicast IP address. Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 187 Chapter 13 IGMP 188 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide CHAPTER 14 Interface Group 14.1 Overview By default, all LAN and WAN interfaces on the ZyXEL Device are in the same group and can communicate with each other. Create interface groups to have the ZyXEL Device assign the IP addresses in different domains to different groups. Each group acts as an independent network on the ZyXEL Device. This lets devices connected to an interface groups LAN interfaces communicate through the interface groups WAN or LAN interfaces but not other WAN or LAN interfaces. 14.2 The Interface Group Screen You can manually add a LAN interface to a new group. Alternatively, you can have the ZyXEL Device automatically add the incoming traffic and the LAN interface on which traffic is received to an interface group when its DHCP Vendor ID option information matches one listed for the interface group. Use the LAN screen to configure the private IP addresses the DHCP server on the ZyXEL Device assigns to the clients in the default and/or user-defined groups. If you set the ZyXEL Device to assign IP addresses based on the clients DHCP Vendor ID option information, you must enable DHCP server and configure LAN TCP/IP settings for both the default and user-defined groups. See Chapter 8 on page 115 for more information. In the following example, the client that sends packets with the DHCP Vendor ID option set to MSFT 5.0 (meaning it is a Windows 2000 DHCP client) is assigned the IP address 192.168.2.2 and uses the WAN VDSL_PoE/ppp0.1 interface. Figure 85 Interface Grouping Application Default: ETH 2~4 192.168.1.x/24 192.168.2.x/24 DHCP Vendor ID option: MSFT 5.0 eth10.0 VDSL_PoE/ppp0.1 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 189 Chapter 14 Interface Group Click Network Settings > Interface Group to open the following screen. Figure 86 Network Settings > Interface Group The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 64 Network Settings > Interface Group LABEL Add New Interface Group DESCRIPTION Click this button to create a new interface group. Group Name This shows the descriptive name of the group. WAN Interface This shows the WAN interfaces in the group. LAN Interfaces This shows the LAN interfaces in the group. Criteria Modify Add This shows the filtering criteria for the group. Click the Delete icon to remove the group. Click this button to create a new group. 14.2.1 Interface Group Configuration Click the Add New Interface Group button in the Interface Group screen to open the following screen. Use this screen to create a new interface group. 190 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Note: An interface can belong to only one group at a time. Figure 87 Interface Group Configuration Chapter 14 Interface Group The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 65 Interface Group Configuration LABEL Group Name DESCRIPTION Enter a name to identify this group. You can enter up to 30 characters. You can use letters, numbers, hyphens (-) and underscores (_). Spaces are not allowed. WAN Interface used in the grouping Grouped LAN Interfaces Available LAN Interfaces Automatically Add Clients With the following DHCP Vendor IDs Select the WAN interface this group uses. The group can have up to one PTM interface and up to one ATM interface. Select No Interface/None to not add a WAN interface to this group. Select one or more LAN interfaces (Ethernet LAN, HPNA or wireless LAN) in the Available LAN Interfaces list and use the left arrow to move them to the Grouped LAN Interfaces list to add the interfaces to this group. To remove a LAN or wireless LAN interface from the Grouped LAN Interfaces, use the right-facing arrow. Click Add to identify LAN hosts to add to the interface group by criteria such as the type of the hardware or firmware. See Section 14.2.2 on page 192 for more information.
This shows the index number of the rule. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 191 Chapter 14 Interface Group Table 65 Interface Group Configuration (continued) LABEL Filter Criteria DESCRIPTION This shows the filtering criteria. The LAN interface on which the matched traffic is received will belong to this group automatically. WildCard Support This shows if wildcard on DHCP option 60 is enabled. Remove Apply Cancel Click the Remove icon to delete this rule from the ZyXEL Device. Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 14.2.2 Interface Grouping Criteria Click the Add button in the Interface Grouping Configuration screen to open the following screen. Figure 88 Interface Grouping Criteria The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 66 Interface Grouping Criteria LABEL Source MAC Address DESCRIPTION Enter the source MAC address of the packet. DHCP Option 60 Select this option and enter the Vendor Class Identifier (Option 60) of the matched traffic, such as the type of the hardware or firmware. Enable wildcard on DHCP option 60 option Select this option to be able to use wildcards in the Vendor Class Identifier configured for DHCP option 60. DHCP Option 61 Select this and enter the device identity of the matched traffic. IAID Enter the Identity Association Identifier (IAID) of the device, for example, the WAN connection index number. 192 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 14 Interface Group Table 66 Interface Grouping Criteria (continued) LABEL DUID type DESCRIPTION Select DUID-LLT (DUID Based on Link-layer Address Plus Time) to enter the hardware type, a time value and the MAC address of the device. Select DUID-EN (DUID Assigned by Vendor Based upon Enterprise Number) to enter the vendors registered enterprise number. Select DUID-LL (DUID Based on Link-layer Address) to enter the devices hardware type and hardware address (MAC address) in the following fields. Select Other to enter any string that identifies the device in the DUID field. DHCP Option 125 Select this and enter vendor specific information of the matched traffic. Enterprise Number Enter the vendors 32-bit enterprise number registered with the IANA (Internet Assigned Numbers Authority). Manufacturer OUI Specify the vendors OUI (Organization Unique Identifier). It is usually the first three bytes of the MAC address. Product Class Enter the product class of the device. Model Name Enter the model name of the device. Serial Number Enter the serial number of the device. WildCard Support This shows if wildcard on DHCP option 60 is enabled. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 193 Chapter 14 Interface Group 194 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide CHAPTER 15 Firewall 15.1 Overview This chapter shows you how to enable and configure the ZyXEL Device firewall. Use the firewall to protect your ZyXEL Device and network from attacks by hackers on the Internet and control access to it. By default the firewall:
allows traffic that originates from your LAN computers to go to all other networks. blocks traffic that originates on other networks from going to the LAN. The following figure illustrates the default firewall action. User A can initiate an IM (Instant Messaging) session from the LAN to the WAN (1). Return traffic for this session is also allowed (2). However other traffic initiated from the WAN is blocked (3 and 4). Figure 89 Default Firewall Action LAN WAN A 1 2 3 4 15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Firewall screen to configure the security level of the firewall on the ZyXEL Device
(Section 15.2 on page 197). Use the Protocol screen to add or remove predefined Internet services and configure firewall rules (Section 15.3 on page 197). Use the Access Control screen to view and configure incoming/outgoing filtering rules (Section 15.4 on page 200). 15.1.2 What You Need to Know SYN Attack A SYN attack floods a targeted system with a series of SYN packets. Each packet causes the targeted system to issue a SYN-ACK response. While the targeted system waits for the ACK that P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 195 Chapter 15 Firewall follows the SYN-ACK, it queues up all outstanding SYN-ACK responses on a backlog queue. SYN-
ACKs are moved off the queue only when an ACK comes back or when an internal timer terminates the three-way handshake. Once the queue is full, the system will ignore all incoming SYN requests, making the system unavailable for legitimate users. DoS Denials of Service (DoS) attacks are aimed at devices and networks with a connection to the Internet. Their goal is not to steal information, but to disable a device or network so users no longer have access to network resources. The ZyXEL Device is pre-configured to automatically detect and thwart all known DoS attacks. DDoS A DDoS attack is one in which multiple compromised systems attack a single target, thereby causing denial of service for users of the targeted system. LAND Attack In a LAND attack, hackers flood SYN packets into the network with a spoofed source IP address of the target system. This makes it appear as if the host computer sent the packets to itself, making the system unavailable while the target system tries to respond to itself. Ping of Death Ping of Death uses a "ping" utility to create and send an IP packet that exceeds the maximum 65,536 bytes of data allowed by the IP specification. This may cause systems to crash, hang or reboot. SPI Stateful Packet Inspection (SPI) tracks each connection crossing the firewall and makes sure it is valid. Filtering decisions are based not only on rules but also context. For example, traffic from the WAN may only be allowed to cross the firewall in response to a request from the LAN. 196 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 15 Firewall 15.2 The Firewall Screen Use this screen to set the security level of the firewall on the ZyXEL Device. Firewall rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply. Click Security Settings > Firewall to display the following screen. Figure 90 Security Settings > Firewall The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 67 Security Settings > Firewall LABEL Low DESCRIPTION Select Low to allow LAN to WAN and WAN to LAN packet directions. Medium High Apply Cancel Select Medium to allow LAN to WAN but deny WAN to LAN packet directions. Select High to deny LAN to WAN and WAN to LAN packet directions. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 15.3 The Protocol Screen You can configure customized services and port numbers in the Protocol screen. For a comprehensive list of port numbers and services, visit the IANA (Internet Assigned Number Authority) website. See Appendix E on page 333 for some examples. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 197 Chapter 15 Firewall Click Security Settings > Firewall > Protocol to display the following screen. Figure 91 Security Settings > Firewall > Protocol The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 68 Security Settings > Firewall > Protocol LABEL Add New Protocol Entry DESCRIPTION Click this to add a new protocol. Name This is the name of your customized service. Description This is the description of your customized service. Ports/
Protocol Number Modify This shows the IP protocol (TCP, UDP, ICMP, or TCP/UDP) and the port number or range of ports that defines your customized service. Other and the protocol number displays if the service uses another IP protocol. Click the Edit icon to edit the entry. Click the Delete icon to remove this entry. 198 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 15 Firewall 15.3.1 Add a Protocol Use this screen to add a customized service rule that you can use in the firewalls ACL rule configuration. Click Add New Protocol Entry in the Protocol screen to display the following screen. Figure 92 Security Settings > Firewall > Protocol > Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 69 Security Settings > Firewall > Protocol > Add LABEL Add Protocol DESCRIPTION Protocol Source/
Destination Port Choose the IP protocol (TCP, UDP, ICMP, or Other) that defines your customized port from the drop-down list box. Select Other to be able to enter a protocol number. These fields are displayed if you select TCP or UDP as the IP port. Select Single to specify one port only or Range to specify a span of ports that define your customized service. If you select Any, the service is applied to all ports. Type a single port number or the range of port numbers that define your customized service. This field is displayed if you select Other as the protocol. Enter the protocol number of your customized port. Click this to add the protocol to the Rule List below. This is the IP port (TCP, UDP, ICMP, or Other) that defines your customized port. Protocol Number Add Rule List Protocol Ports/Protocol Number For TCP, UDP, ICMP, or TCP/UDP protocol rules this shows the port number or range that defines the custom service. For other IP protocol rules this shows the protocol number. Modify Click the Delete icon to remove the rule. Service Name Enter a unique name (up to 32 printable English keyboard characters, including spaces) for your customized port. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 199 Chapter 15 Firewall Table 69 Security Settings > Firewall > Protocol > Add (continued) LABEL Service Description DESCRIPTION Enter a description for your customized port. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 15.4 The Access Control Screen Click Security Settings > Firewall > Access Control to display the following screen. This screen displays a list of the configured incoming or outgoing filtering rules. Figure 93 Security Settings > Firewall > Access Control The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 70 Security Settings > Firewall > Access Control LABEL DoS Protection DESCRIPTION DoS (Denial of Service) attacks can flood your Internet connection with invalid packets and connection requests, using so much bandwidth and so many resources that Internet access becomes unavailable. State Select the Enable check box to enable protection against DoS attacks. Deny Ping Response You can block ping request packets by enabling this function. State Select the Enable check box to block ping packets. Add New ACL Rule Name Src IP Dst IP Protocol Click this to go to add a filter rule for incoming or outgoing IP traffic. This displays the name of the rule. This displays the source IP addresses to which this rule applies. Please note that a blank source address is equivalent to Any. This displays the destination IP addresses to which this rule applies. Please note that a blank destination address is equivalent to Any. This displays the transport layer protocol that defines the service to which this rule applies. 200 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 15 Firewall Table 70 Security Settings > Firewall > Access Control (continued) LABEL Direction DESCRIPTION This displays the direction of traffic to which this rule applies. Action This field displays whether the rule silently discards packets (DROP), discards packets and sends a TCP reset packet or an ICMP destination-unreachable message to the sender (REJECT) or allows the passage of packets (ACCEPT). Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the rule. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save the DoS Protection settings. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 15.4.1 Add/Edit an ACL Rule Click Add New ACL Rule or the Edit icon next to an existing ACL rule in the Access Control screen. The following screen displays. Figure 94 Security Settings > Firewall > Access Control > Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 71 Security Settings > Firewall > Access Control > Add/Edit LABEL General DESCRIPTION Filter Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 16 alphanumeric characters, not including spaces, underscores, and dashes. You must enter the filter name to add an ACL rule. This field is read-only if you are editing the ACL rule. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 201 Chapter 15 Firewall Table 71 Security Settings > Firewall > Access Control > Add/Edit (continued) LABEL Select Source Device DESCRIPTION Select the source device to which the ACL rule applies. If you select Specific IP Address, enter the source IP address in the field below. Source IP Address Enter the source IP address. Select Destination Device Select the destination device to which the ACL rule applies. If you select Specific IP Address, enter the destiniation IP address in the field below. Destination IP Address Select Protocol Enter the destination IP address. Select the transport layer protocol that defines your customized port from the drop-down list box. The specific protocol rule sets you add in the Security Settings > Firewall > Protocol > Add screen display in this list. If you want to configure a customized protocol, select Specific Protocol. Protocol This field is displayed only when you select Specific Protocol in Select Protocol. Choose the IP port (TCP/UDP, TCP, UDP, or ICMP) that defines your customized port from the drop-down list box. Custom Source Port This field is displayed only when you select Specific Protocol in Select Protocol. Enter a single port number or the range of port numbers of the source. Custom Destination Port This field is displayed only when you select Specific Protocol in Select Protocol. Policy Direction Enter a single port number or the range of port numbers of the destination. Use the drop-down list box to select whether to discard (DROP), deny and send an ICMP destination-unreachable message to the sender of (REJECT) or allow the passage of (ACCEPT) packets that match this rule. Use the drop-down list box to select the direction of traffic to which this rule applies. Enable Rate Limit Select this check box to set a limit on the upstream/downstream transmission rate for the specified protocol. Scheduler Rules Specify how many packets per minute or second the transmission rate is. Select a schedule rule for this ACL rule form the drop-down list box. You can configure a new schedule rule by click Add new rule. This will bring you to the Security Settings > Scheduler Rules screen. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 202 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide CHAPTER 16 MAC Filter 16.1 Overview This screen allows you to configure the ZyXEL Device to give exclusive access to specific devices or exclude specific devices from accessing the ZyXEL Device. Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC
(Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You need to know the MAC addresses of the devices to configure this screen. 16.2 The MAC Filter Screen Use this screen to change your ZyXEL Devices MAC filter settings. Click Security Settings > MAC Filter. The screen appears as shown. Figure 95 Security Settings > MAC Filter The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 72 Security Settings > MAC Filter DESCRIPTION LABEL MAC Filter Setup MAC Filter Select Enable to activate the MAC filter function. Otherwise, select Disable. Add new devices to the Allow List automatically Select this check box if you want the ZyXEL Device to automatically add the newly connected devices to the Allow List. MAC Filter Lists P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 203 Chapter 16 MAC Filter Table 72 Security Settings > MAC Filter (continued) LABEL Allow List DESCRIPTION The devices in this list are permitted or denied access to the ZyXEL Device. Block List Add Device
Device MAC Address Modify Select an entry from the Allow List and use the > button to add it to the Block List. Select an entry from the Block List and use the < button to add it to the Allow List. Select this to display the Add Device screen which you can add a device to the MAC filter Allow List. Enter the devices MAC address and click OK. This is the index number of the entry. This is the name of the device that is allowed access to the ZyXEL Device. This is the MAC address of the device that is allowed access to the ZyXEL Device. Select the entry(ies) that you want to delete in the Remove column, then click the Delete icon. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 204 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide CHAPTER 17 Parental Control 17.1 Overview Parental control allows you to permit or block access to certain web sites from home network computers. You can define time periods and days during which the ZyXEL Device performs parental control on a specific user in the Security Settings > Scheduler Rules screen (see Chapter 18 on page 209 for detailed information). 17.2 The Parental Control Screen Use this screen to configure parental control settings to block the users on your network from accessing certain web sites. Click Parental Control to open the following screen. Note: You must configure a scheduler rule in the Advanced > Scheduler Rule screen
(Section 18.2 on page 209) before the parental control function can be enabled. Click Scheduler Rule in the note to go to the Scheduler Rule screen for configurations. Figure 96 Parental Control P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 205 Chapter 17 Parental Control The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 73 Parental Control LABEL Add new rule DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new parental control rule.
This is the index number of the rule. PC Name/IP/MAC The ZyXEL Device allows or prohibits the users from viewing the Web sites with the URLs listed below. Access Type This shows the access type that is applied on the user to the web site of this rule. Web Site This is the URL of the web site in this rule. Scheduler Name This is the name of the schedule rule that is applied. Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the rule. Apply Cancel Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 17.2.1 Add/Edit Parental Control Rule Click Add new rule in the Parental Control screen or click the Edit icon next to a rule to open the following screen. Figure 97 Parental Control: Add/Edit 206 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 17 Parental Control The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 74 Parental Control: Add/Edit LABEL PC Name/IP/MAC DESCRIPTION Select the user that you want to apply this rule to from the drop-down list box. If you want to add an user that is not listed, select User Defined and enter its MAC address. This field is read-only if you are editing the parental control rule. Access Type Select the access type that is applied on the user to the web site of this rule. If you select Block Web Site, the ZyXEL Device prohibits the users from viewing the web sites with the URLs listed below. If you select Allow Web Site, the ZyXEL Device blocks access to all URLs except ones listed below. If you select Block All, the ZyXEL Device blocks access to all URLs. Web Site Enter the URL of web site to which the ZyXEL Device blocks or allows access. Click Add to add this URL to the list below. Remove Select an URL from the list and click Remove to delete it. Scheduler Rule Select the scheduler rule that you want to apply from the drop-down list box. If you have not configured a scheduler rule or want to add a new one, click the Add New Rule button to go to the Scheduler Rule screen. See Chapter 18 on page 209 for more information. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 207 Chapter 17 Parental Control 208 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide CHAPTER 18 Scheduler Rules 18.1 Overview You can define time periods and days during which the ZyXEL Device performs scheduled rules of certain features (such as Firewall Access Control, Parental Control) on a specific user in the Scheduler Rules screen. 18.2 The Scheduler Rules Screen Use this screen to view, add, or edit time schedule rules. Click Advanced > Scheduler Rules to open the following screen. Figure 98 Advanced > Scheduler Rules The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 75 Advanced > Scheduler Rules LABEL Add new rule DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new rule.
This is the index number of the entry. Rule Name This shows the name of the rule. Day Time This shows the day(s) on which this rule is enabled. This shows the period of time on which this rule is enabled. Description This shows the description of this rule. Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the schedule. Click the Delete icon to delete a scheduler rule. Note: You cannot delete a scheduler rule once it is applied to a certain feature. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 209 Chapter 18 Scheduler Rules 18.2.1 Add/Edit a Schedule Click the Add button in the Scheduler Rules screen or click the Edit icon next to a schedule rule to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure a restricted access schedule for a specific user on your network. Figure 99 Scheduler Rules: Add/Edit The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 76 Scheduler Rules: Add/Edit LABEL Rule Name DESCRIPTION Enter a name (up to 31 printable English keyboard characters, not including spaces) for this schedule. Day Select check boxes for the days that you want the ZyXEL Device to perform this scheduler rule. Time if Day Range Enter the time period of each day, in 24-hour format, during which parental control will be enforced. Description Enter a description for this scheduler rule. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 210 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide CHAPTER 19 Certificates 19.1 Overview The ZyXEL Device can use certificates (also called digital IDs) to authenticate users. Certificates are based on public-private key pairs. A certificate contains the certificate owners identity and public key. Certificates provide a way to exchange public keys for use in authentication. 19.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Local Certificates screen lets you generate certification requests and import the ZyXEL Device's CA-signed certificates (Section 19.4 on page 219). The Trusted CA screen lets you save the certificates of trusted CAs to the ZyXEL Device (Section 19.4 on page 219). 19.2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. Certification Authority A Certification Authority (CA) issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner. There are commercial certification authorities like CyberTrust or VeriSign and government certification authorities. The certification authority uses its private key to sign certificates. Anyone can then use the certification authority's public key to verify the certificates. You can use the ZyXEL Device to generate certification requests that contain identifying information and public keys and then send the certification requests to a certification authority. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 211 Chapter 19 Certificates 19.3 The Local Certificates Screen Click Security Settings > Certificates to open the Local Certificates screen. This is the ZyXEL Devices summary list of certificates and certification requests. Figure 100 Security Settings > Certificates > Local Certificates The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 77 Security Settings > Certificates > Local Certificates LABEL Create Certificate Request DESCRIPTION Click this button to go to the screen where you can have the ZyXEL Device generate a certification request. Import Certificate Click this button to open a screen where you can save the certificate that you have enrolled from a certification authority from your computer to the ZyXEL Device. Name In Use Subject This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. It is recommended that you give each certificate a unique name. This field displays whether the certificate is in use and how many applications use the certificate. This field displays identifying information about the certificates owner, such as CN (Common Name), OU (Organizational Unit or department), O (Organization or company) and C (Country). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information. Type This field displays what kind of certificate this is. request represents a certification request and is not yet a valid certificate. Send a certification request to a certification authority, which then issues a certificate. Use the Load Certificate screen to import the certificate and replace the request. signed represents a certificate issued by a certification authority. Modify Click the View icon to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the certificate (or certification request). For a certification request, click Load Signed to import the signed certificate. Click the Remove icon to delete the certificate (or certification request). You cannot delete a certificate that one or more features is configured to use. 212 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 19 Certificates 19.3.1 Create Certificate Request Click Security Settings > Certificates > Local Certificates and then Create Certificate Request to open the following screen. Use this screen to have the ZyXEL Device generate a certification request. Figure 101 Create Certificate Request The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 78 Create Certificate Request LABEL DESCRIPTION Type up to 63 ASCII characters (not including spaces) to identify this Certificate Name certificate. Common Name Organization Name State/Province Name Country/Region Name Apply Cancel Type the IP address (in dotted decimal notation), domain name or e-mail address in the field provided. The domain name or e-mail address can be up to 63 ASCII characters. The domain name or e-mail address is for identification purposes only and can be any string. Type up to 63 characters to identify the company or group to which the certificate owner belongs. You may use any character, including spaces, but the ZyXEL Device drops trailing spaces. Type up to 32 characters to identify the state or province where the certificate owner is located. You may use any character, including spaces, but the ZyXEL Device drops trailing spaces. Select a country to identify the nation where the certificate owner is located. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. After you click Apply, the following screen displays to notify you that you need to get the certificate request signed by a Certificate Authority. If you already have, click Load_Signed to import the signed certificate into the ZyXEL Device. Otherwise click Back to return to the Local Certificates screen. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 213 Chapter 19 Certificates Figure 102 Certificate Request Created 19.3.2 Load Signed Certificate After you create a certificate request and have it signed by a Certificate Authority, in the Local Certificates screen click the certificate requests Load Signed icon to import the signed certificate into the ZyXEL Device. 214 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Note: You must remove any spaces from the certificates filename before you can import it. Figure 103 Load Signed Certificate Chapter 19 Certificates The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 79 Load Signed Certificate LABEL Certificate Name DESCRIPTION This is the name of the signed certificate. Certificate Copy and paste the signed certificate into the text box to store it on the ZyXEL Device. Apply Back Click Apply to save your changes. Click Back to return to the previous screen. 19.3.3 Import Certificate Click Security Settings > Local Certificates and then Import Certificate to open the Import Local Certificate screen. Follow the instructions in this screen to save an existing certificate to the ZyXEL Device. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 215 Chapter 19 Certificates Note: You must remove any spaces from the certificates filename before you can import it. Figure 104 Import Local Certificate The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 80 Import Local Certificate LABEL Import from file DESCRIPTION Click this check box to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a certification authority that you trust, from your computer to the ZyXEL Device. Certificate Name Type up to 63 ASCII characters (not including spaces) to identify this certificate. Certificate Copy and paste the certificate into the text box to store it on the ZyXEL Device. Private Key Copy and paste the private key into the text box to store it on the ZyXEL Device. 216 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 19 Certificates Table 80 Import Local Certificate (continued) LABEL Apply DESCRIPTION Click Apply to save your changes. Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. If you click Import from file in the Import Local Certificate screen, the following screen is displayed. Figure 105 Import Local Certificate > Import from file The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 81 Import Local Certificate > Import from file LABEL Certificate File Path DESCRIPTION Type in the location of the certificate you want to upload in this field or click Browse ... to find it. Private Key is protected by a password?
Apply Back Enter the private key into the text box to store it on the ZyXEL Device. The private key should not exceed 63 ASCII characters (not including spaces). Click Apply to save your changes. Click Back to return to the previous screen. 19.3.4 Certificate Details Click Security Settings> Certificates > Local Certificates to open the My Certificates screen. Click the View icon to open the Certificate Details screen. Use this screen to view in-depth certificate information and change the certificates name. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 217 Chapter 19 Certificates Figure 106 Certificate Details The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 82 Certificate Details LABEL Name DESCRIPTION This field displays the identifying name of this certificate. If you want to change the name, type up to 63 characters to identify this certificate. You may use any character (not including spaces). Type Subject Certificate This field displays general information about the certificate. signed means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate. request means this is a certification request. This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common Name (CN), Organization (O), State (ST) and Country (C). This read-only text box displays the certificate in Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses base 64 to convert the binary certificate into a printable form. This displays null in a certification request. You can copy and paste the certificate into an e-mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution (via floppy disk for example). 218 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 19 Certificates Table 82 Certificate Details (continued) LABEL Private Key DESCRIPTION This read-only text box displays the private key in Privacy Enhanced Mail
(PEM) format. PEM uses base 64 to convert the binary certificate into a printable form. Signing Request You can copy and paste the private key into an e-mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution (via floppy disk for example). This read-only text box displays the request information in Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses base 64 to convert the binary certificate into a printable form. This displays null in a signed certificate. Back Click Back to return to the previous screen. 19.4 The Trusted CA Screen Click Security Settings > Certificates > Trusted CA to open the following screen. This screen displays a summary list of certificates of the certification authorities that you have set the ZyXEL Device to accept as trusted. The ZyXEL Device accepts any valid certificate signed by a certification authority on this list as being trustworthy; thus you do not need to import any certificate that is signed by one of these certification authorities. Figure 107 Security Settings > Certificates > Trusted CA The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 83 Security Settings > Certificates > Trusted CA LABEL Import Certificate DESCRIPTION Click this button to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a certification authority that you trust to the ZyXEL Device. Name Subject This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common Name (CN), OU (Organizational Unit or department), Organization
(O), State (ST) and Country (C). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 219 Chapter 19 Certificates Table 83 Security Settings > Certificates > Trusted CA (continued) LABEL Type DESCRIPTION This field displays general information about the certificate. ca means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate. Action Click the View icon to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the certificate (or certification request). Click the Remove button to delete the certificate (or certification request). You cannot delete a certificate that one or more features is configured to use. 19.4.1 View Trusted CA Certificate Click the View icon in the Trusted CA screen to open the following screen. Use this screen to view in-depth information about the certification authoritys certificate. Figure 108 Trusted CA: View The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 84 Trusted CA: View LABEL Name DESCRIPTION This field displays the identifying name of this certificate. Type Subject Certificate This field displays general information about the certificate. ca means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate. This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common Name (CN), Organizational Unit (OU), Organization (O) and Country (C). This read-only text box displays the certificate in Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses base 64 to convert the binary certificate into a printable form. You can copy and paste the certificate into an e-mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution (via floppy disk for example). Back Click Back to return to the previous screen. 220 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 19.4.2 Import Trusted CA Certificate Click the Import Certificate button in the Trusted CA screen to open the following screen. The ZyXEL Device trusts any valid certificate signed by any of the imported trusted CA certificates. Figure 109 Trusted CA: Import Certificate Chapter 19 Certificates The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 85 Trusted CA: Import Certificate LABEL Import from file DESCRIPTION Click this check box to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a certification authority that you trust, from your computer to the ZyXEL Device. Certificate Name Enter the name that identifies this certificate. The certificate name should not exceed 63 ASCII characters (not including spaces). Certificate Copy and paste the certificate into the text box to store it on the ZyXEL Device. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 221 Chapter 19 Certificates If you click Import from file in the Import Local Certificate screen, the following screen is displayed. Figure 110 Trusted CA: Import Certificate > Import from file The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 86 Import Local Certificate LABEL Certificate File Path DESCRIPTION Type in the location of the certificate you want to upload in this field or click Browse ... to find it. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 222 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide CHAPTER 20 Service Control 20.1 Overview This chapter provides information on the Service Control screens. Service Control allows you to manage your ZyXEL Device from a remote location through the following interfaces:
LAN WAN Note: The ZyXEL Device is managed using the Web Configurator. 20.2 The Service Control Screen Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) users can use which service(s) to manage the ZyXEL Device. Click Security Settings > Service Control to open the following screen. Figure 111 Security Settings > Service Control P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 223 Chapter 20 Service Control The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 87 Security Settings > Service Control LABEL General DESCRIPTION
This is the index number of the entry. Services Name This is the service you may use to access the ZyXEL Device. LAN WAN Port Certificate HTTPS Certificate Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to the ZyXEL Device from the LAN. Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to the ZyXEL Device from the WAN. You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management. Select a certificate the HTTPS server (the ZyXEL Device) uses to authenticate itself to the HTTPS client. You must have certificates already configured in the Certificates screen. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 224 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide CHAPTER 21 ARP Table 21.1 Overview Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address (IP address) to a physical machine address, also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address, on the local area network. An IP (version 4) address is 32 bits long. In an Ethernet LAN, MAC addresses are 48 bits long. The ARP Table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address. 21.1.1 How ARP Works When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the device, the device's ARP program looks in the ARP Table and, if it finds the address, sends it to the device. If no entry is found for the IP address, ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the LAN. The device fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields, and puts the known IP address of the target in the target IP address field. In addition, the device puts all ones in the target MAC field (FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF is the Ethernet broadcast address). The replying device (which is either the IP address of the device being sought or the router that knows the way) replaces the broadcast address with the target's MAC address, swaps the sender and target pairs, and unicasts the answer directly back to the requesting machine. ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference and then sends the packet to the MAC address that replied. 21.2 ARP Table Screen Use the ARP table to view IP-to-MAC address mapping(s). To open this screen, click System Monitor > ARP Table. Figure 112 System Monitor > ARP Table P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 225 Chapter 21 ARP Table The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 88 System Monitor > ARP Table LABEL
DESCRIPTION This is the ARP table entry number. IP Address This is the learned IP address of a device connected to a port. MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device with the listed IP address. Device This is the type of interface used by the device. You can click on the device type to go to its configuration screen. 226 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide CHAPTER 22 Logs 22.1 Overview The web configurator allows you to choose which categories of events and/or alerts to have the ZyXEL Device log and then display the logs or have the ZyXEL Device send them to an administrator (as e-mail) or to a syslog server. 22.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the System Log screen to see the system logs for the categories that you select (Section 22.2 on page 228). Use the Security Log screen to see the security-related logs for the categories that you select
(Section 22.3 on page 229). 22.1.2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter. Alerts and Logs An alert is a type of log that warrants more serious attention. They include system errors, attacks
(access control) and attempted access to blocked web sites. Some categories such as System Errors consist of both logs and alerts. You may differentiate them by their color in the View Log screen. Alerts display in red and logs display in black. Syslog Overview The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network to syslog servers that collect the event messages. A syslog-enabled device can generate a syslog message and send it to a syslog server. Syslog is defined in RFC 3164. The RFC defines the packet format, content and system log related information of syslog messages. Each syslog message has a facility and severity level. The syslog facility identifies a file in the syslog server. Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for details. The following table describes the syslog severity levels. Table 89 Syslog Severity Levels CODE 0 SEVERITY Emergency: The system is unusable. 1 2 3 Alert: Action must be taken immediately. Critical: The system condition is critical. Error: There is an error condition on the system. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 227 Chapter 22 Logs Table 89 Syslog Severity Levels (continued) CODE 4 SEVERITY Warning: There is a warning condition on the system. 5 6 7 Notice: There is a normal but significant condition on the system. Informational: The syslog contains an informational message. Debug: The message is intended for debug-level purposes. 22.2 The System Log Screen Use the System Log screen to see the system logs for the categories that you select in Maintenance > Log Setting. Click System Monitor > Log to open the System Log screen. Figure 113 System Monitor > Log > System Log The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 90 System Monitor > Log > System Log LABEL Level DESCRIPTION Select a severity level from the drop-down list box. This filters search results according to the severity level you have selected. When you select a severity, the ZyXEL Device searches through all logs of that severity or higher. Category Clear Log Refresh Select the type of logs to display. Click this to delete all the logs. Click this to renew the log screen. Export Log Click this to export the selected log(s). Email Log Now Click this to send the log file(s) to the E-mail address you specify in the Maintenance > Logs Setting screen. System Log 228 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 22 Logs Table 90 System Monitor > Log > System Log (continued) LABEL
DESCRIPTION This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry. Time Facility Level This field displays the time the log was recorded. The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server. Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for more details. This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog server. Messages This field states the reason for the log. 22.3 The Security Log Screen Use the Security Log screen to see the security-related logs for the categories that you select. Click System Monitor > Log > Security Log to open the following screen. Figure 114 System Monitor > Log > Security Log The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 91 System Monitor > Log > Security Log LABEL Level DESCRIPTION Select a severity level from the drop-down list box. This filters search results according to the severity level you have selected. When you select a severity, the ZyXEL Device searches through all logs of that severity or higher. Category Clear Log Refresh Select the type of logs to display. Click this to delete all the logs. Click this to renew the log screen. Export Log Click this to export the selected log(s). Email Log Now Click this to send the log file(s) to the E-mail address you specify in the Maintenance > Logs Setting screen.
Time Facility Level This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry. This field displays the time the log was recorded. The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server. Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for more details. This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog server. Messages This field states the reason for the log. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 229 Chapter 22 Logs 230 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide CHAPTER 23 Traffic Status 23.1 Overview Use the Traffic Status screens to look at network traffic status and statistics of the WAN and LAN interfaces. 23.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the WAN screen to view the WAN traffic statistics (Section 23.2 on page 231). Use the LAN screen to view the LAN traffic statistics (Section 23.3 on page 233). Use the HPNA screen to view the HPNA traffic statistics (Section 23.4 on page 234). 23.2 The WAN Status Screen Click System Monitor > Traffic Status to open the WAN screen. The figure in this screen shows the number of bytes received and sent on the ZyXEL Device. Figure 115 System Monitor > Traffic Status > WAN P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 231 Chapter 23 Traffic Status The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 92 System Monitor > Traffic Status > WAN LABEL Connected Interface DESCRIPTION This shows the name of the WAN interface that is currently connected. Packets Sent Data Error Drop Packets Received This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface. This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface. Data Error Drop This indicates the number of received packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface. This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface. more.../less Click more... to show more information. Click less to hide them. Disabled Interface Packets Sent Data Error Drop Packets Received This shows the name of the WAN interface that is currently disconnected. This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface. This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface. Data Error Drop This indicates the number of received packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface. This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface. 232 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 23.3 The LAN Status Screen Click System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN to open the following screen. Figure 116 System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN Chapter 23 Traffic Status The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 93 System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN LABEL Polls Interval(s) DESCRIPTION Select how often you want the ZyXEL Device to update this screen. Interface This shows the LAN or WLAN interface. Bytes Sent This indicates the number of bytes transmitted on this interface. Bytes Received This indicates the number of bytes received on this interface. more.../less Click more... to show more information. Click less to hide them. Interface This shows the LAN or WLAN interface. Packets Sent Data Error Drop Packets Received This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface. This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface. Data Error Drop This indicates the number of received packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface. This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 233 Chapter 23 Traffic Status 23.4 The HPNA Status Screen Click System Monitor > Traffic Status > HPNA to open the following screen. Figure 117 System Monitor > Traffic Status > HPNA The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 94 System Monitor > Traffic Status > HPNA LABEL Role DESCRIPTION This shows the role of the client connected to the ZyXEL Devices HPNA port. Device TX Packet RX Packet TX Byte RX Byte TX Error RX Error TX Drop RX Drop This shows the MAC address of the client connected to the ZyXEL Devices HPNA port. This indicates the number of packets transmitted by this client. This indicates the number of packets received by this client. This indicates the number of bytes transmitted on this interface. This indicates the number of bytes received on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface. This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface. This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface. 234 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide CHAPTER 24 IGMP Status 24.1 Overview Use the IGMP Status screens to look at IGMP group status and traffic statistics. 24.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the IGMP Group screen to look at the current list of multicast groups the ZyXEL Device has joined and which ports have joined each (Section 24.2 on page 235. Use the IGMP Statistics screen to look at the current number of IGMP-related packets received for each IGMP multicast group and from each LAN host (Section 24.3 on page 236). 24.2 The IGMP Group Screen Use this screen to look at the current list of multicast groups the ZyXEL Device has joined and which ports have joined it. To open this screen, click System Monitor > IGMP Group Status >
IGMP Group. Figure 118 System Monitor > IGMP Group Status > IGMP Group The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 95 System Monitor > IGMP Group Status > IGMP Group LABEL Interface DESCRIPTION This field displays the name of an interface on the ZyXEL Device that belongs to an IGMP multicast group. Multicast Group This field displays the name of the IGMP multicast group to which the interface belongs. Filter Mode INCLUDE means that only the IP addresses in the Source List get to receive the multicast groups traffic. EXCLUDE means that the IP addresses in the Source List are not allowed to receive the multicast groups traffic but other IP addresses can. Source List This is the list of IP addresses that are allowed or not allowed to receive the multicast groups traffic depending on the filter mode. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 235 Chapter 24 24.3 IGMP Statistics Screen Use this screen to look at the current number of IGMP-related packets received for each IGMP multicast group and from each LAN host. To open this screen, click System Monitor > IGMP Group Status > IGMP Statistics. Figure 119 System Monitor > IGMP Group Status > IGMP Statistics The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 96 System Monitor > IGMP Group Status > IGMP Statistics LABEL IGMP Multicast Group Statistics DESCRIPTION This section shows statistics about the number of IGMP-related packets received for each IGMP multicast group. Multicast Group This field displays the name of the IGMP multicast group for which the ZyXEL Device received IGMP-related packets. Last Report Time Total Time
(sec) Total Joins Total Leaves This field displays when the ZyXEL Device received the latest packet for this IGMP multicast group. This field displays the total amount of time the ZyXEL Device counted from when the IGMP multicast group was joined to when it was left. This field displays the total number of Join packets the ZyXEL Device has received for this IGMP multicast group. This field displays the total number of Leave packets the ZyXEL Device has received for this IGMP multicast group. IGMP LAN Host Statistics This section shows statistics about the number of IGMP-related packets received from each LAN host. Host Address This field displays the IP address of a LAN computer that has sent the ZyXEL Device IGMP-related packets. Last Report Time Total Time
(sec) Total Joins Total Leaves This field displays when the ZyXEL Device received the latest packet from this LAN IP address for this IGMP multicast group. This field displays the total amount of time the ZyXEL Device counted from when the LAN IP address joined the IGMP multicast group to when it left. This field displays the total number of Join packets the ZyXEL Device has received from this LAN IP address. This field displays the total number of Leave packets the ZyXEL Device has received from this LAN IP address. 236 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide CHAPTER 25 xDSL Statistics 25.1 The xDSL Statistics Screen Use this screen to view detailed DSL statistics. Click System Monitor > xDSL Statistics to open the following screen. Figure 120 System Monitor > xDSL Statistics P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 237 Chapter 25 xDSL Statistics The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 97 Status > xDSL Statistics LABEL Refresh Interval DESCRIPTION Select the time interval for refreshing statistics. Line Select which DSL lines statistics you want to display. xDSL Training Status Mode Traffic Type Link Uptime xDSL Port Details Upstream This displays the current state of setting up the DSL connection. This displays the ITU standard used for this connection. This displays the type of traffic the DSL port is sending and receiving. Inactive displays if the DSL port is not currently sending or receiving traffic. This displays how long the port has been running (or connected) since the last time it was started. These are the statistics for the traffic direction going out from the port to the service provider. Downstream These are the statistics for the traffic direction coming into the port from the service provider. Line Rate These are the data transfer rates at which the port is sending and receiving data. Actual Net Data Rate These are the rates at which the port is sending and receiving the payload data without transport layer protocol headers and traffic. Trellis Coding SNR Margin Actual Delay This displays whether or not the port is using Trellis coding for traffic it is sending and receiving. Trellis coding helps to reduce the noise in ADSL transmissions. Trellis may reduce throughput but it makes the connection more stable. This is the upstream and downstream Signal-to-Noise Ratio margin (in dB). A DMT sub-carriers SNR is the ratio between the received signal power and the received noise power. The signal-to-noise ratio margin is the maximum that the received noise power could increase with the system still being able to meet its transmission targets. This is the upstream and downstream interleave delay. It is the wait (in milliseconds) that determines the size of a single block of data to be interleaved
(assembled) and then transmitted. Interleave delay is used when transmission error correction (Reed- Solomon) is necessary due to a less than ideal telephone line. The bigger the delay, the bigger the data block size, allowing better error correction to be performed. Transmit Power This is the upstream and downstream far end actual aggregate transmit power (in dBm). Upstream is how much power the port is using to transmit to the service provider. Downstream is how much port the service provider is using to transmit to the port. Receive Power Upstream is how much power the service provider is receiving from the port. Downstream is how much power the port is receiving from the service provider. Actual INP Sudden spikes in the lines level of external noise (impulse noise) can cause errors and result in lost packets. This could especially impact the quality of multimedia traffic such as voice or video. Impulse noise protection (INP) provides a buffer to allow for correction of errors caused by error correction to deal with this. The number of DMT (Discrete Multi-Tone) symbols shows the level of impulse noise protection for the upstream and downstream traffic. A higher symbol value provides higher error correction capability, but it causes overhead and higher delay which may increase error rates in received multimedia data. Total Attenuation This is the upstream and downstream line attenuation, measured in decibels (dB). This attenuation is the difference between the power transmitted at the near-end and the power received at the far-end. Attenuation is affected by the channel characteristics (wire gauge, quality, condition and length of the physical line). 238 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 25 xDSL Statistics Table 97 Status > xDSL Statistics (continued) LABEL Attainable Net Data Rate DESCRIPTION These are the highest theoretically possible transfer rates at which the port could send and receive payload data without transport layer protocol headers and traffic. xDSL Counters Downstream These are the statistics for the traffic direction coming into the port from the service provider. Upstream These are the statistics for the traffic direction going out from the port to the service provider. FEC CRC ES SES UAS LOS LOF LOM This is the number of Far End Corrected blocks. This is the number of Cyclic Redundancy Checks. This is the number of Errored Seconds meaning the number of seconds containing at least one errored block or at least one defect. This is the number of Severely Errored Seconds meaning the number of seconds containing 30% or more errored blocks or at least one defect. This is a subset of ES. This is the number of UnAvailable Seconds. This is the number of Loss Of Signal seconds. This is the number of Loss Of Frame seconds. This is the number of Loss of Margin seconds. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 239 Chapter 25 xDSL Statistics 240 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide CHAPTER 26 Users Configuration 26.1 Overview In the Users Configuration screen, you can view, add, and configure user accounts of the ZyXEL Device. 26.2 The Users Configuration Screen Click Maintenance > Users Configuration to open the following screen. Figure 121 Maintenance > Users Configuration P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 241 Chapter 26 Users Configuration The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 98 Maintenance > Users Configuration LABEL Advanced Account Security DESCRIPTION Select Enable to turn on advanced account security to enforce tighter security for the ZyXEL Devices user accounts. This includes:
The user names must be a minimum length of six characters and include both letters and numbers. The number of dots that appears when you type the password in the login screens password field changes randomly to prevent anyone watching the password field from knowing the length of your password. The ZyXEL Device notifies users when their passwords expire and forces them to change to a new one in order to log in. The new password the user selects cannot match any of the users three previously used passwords. Add new user Click this to configure a new user account.
This is the index number of the entry. User Name This field displays the name of the user. Retry Times Idle Timeout Lock Period This field indicates how many times a user can re-enter his/her account information before the ZyXEL Device locks the user out. This field indicates the number of minutes that the system can idle before being logged out. This field indicates the number of minutes for the lockout period. A user cannot log into the ZyXEL Device during the lockout period, even if he/she enters correct account information. Group This field displays the login account type of the user. Different login account types have different privilege levels. The web configurator screens and privileges vary depending on which account type you use to log in. Modify Click the Edit icon to edit this user account. 26.2.1 Add/Edit a Users Account Use this screen to add or edit a users account. Click Add new user in the Users Configuration screen or the Edit icon next to the user account you want to edit. The screen shown next appears. Figure 122 Users Configuration: Add/Edit 242 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 26 Users Configuration The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 99 Users Configuration: Add/Edit LABEL User Name DESCRIPTION This field is read-only if you are editing the user account. Enter a descriptive name for the user account. The user name can be up to 15 alphanumeric characters (0-9, A-Z, a-z, -, _ with no spaces). With advanced account security enabled, the user names must be a minimum length of six characters and include both letters and numbers. Password Specify the password associated to this account. The password can be 6 to 15 alphanumeric characters (0-9, A-Z, a-z, -, _ with no spaces), not containing the user name. It must contain both letters and numbers. The characters are displayed as asterisks (*) in this field. Verify Password Enter the exact same password that you just entered in the above field. Verify New Password Retry Times This field is displayed only when you are editing the user account. Enter the exact same password that you just entered in the above field. The ZyXEL Device can lock a user out if you use a wrong user name or password to log in the ZyXEL Device. Enter up to how many times a user can re-enter his/her account information before the ZyXEL Device locks the user out. Idle Timeout Enter the number of minutes that the system can idle before being logged out. Lock Period Enter the number of minutes for the lockout period. A user cannot log into the ZyXEL Device during the lockout period, even if he/she enters correct account information. Group This field is read-only if you are editing the user account. Select a type of login account. The web configurator screens and privileges vary depending on which account type you use to log in. Administrator accounts can configure the ZyXEL Device while User accounts can only view some status information. Users logged in with either type of account can access the Internet. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 243 Chapter 26 Users Configuration 244 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide CHAPTER 27 Remote Management 27.1 Overview This chapter explains how to configure the ZyXEL Devices TR-069 and TR-064 auto-configuration settings. 27.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The TR-069 screen lets you configure the ZyXEL Devices TR-069 auto-configuration settings
(Section 27.2 on page 245). The TR-064 screen lets you enable management via TR-064 on the ZyXEL Device (Section 27.3 on page 247). Your ZyXEL Device can act as an SNMP agent, which allows a manager station to manage and monitor the ZyXEL Device through the network. Use the SNMP Agent screen to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use SNMP to access the ZyXEL Device. 27.2 The TR-069 Clients Screen TR-069 defines how Customer Premise Equipment (CPE), for example your ZyXEL Device, can be managed over the WAN by an Auto Configuration Server (ACS). TR-069 is based on sending Remote Procedure Calls (RPCs) between an ACS and a client device. RPCs are sent in Extensible Markup Language (XML) format over HTTP or HTTPS. An administrator can use an ACS to remotely set up the ZyXEL Device, modify settings, perform firmware upgrades as well as monitor and diagnose the ZyXEL Device. You have to enable the device to be managed by the ACS and specify the ACS IP address or domain name and username and password. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 245 Chapter 27 Remote Management Click Maintenance > Remote MGMT > TR-069 Client to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure your ZyXEL Device to be managed by an ACS. Figure 123 Maintenance > Remote MGMT > TR-069 Client The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 100 Maintenance > Remote MGMT > TR-069 Client LABEL Inform DESCRIPTION Select Enable for the ZyXEL Device to send periodic inform via TR-069 on the WAN. Otherwise, select Disable. Inform Interval Enter the time interval (in seconds) at which the ZyXEL Device sends information to the auto-configuration server. ACS URL Enter the URL or IP address of the auto-configuration server. ACS User Name ACS Password WAN Interface used by TR-069 client Display SOAP messages on serial console Connection Request Authentication Connection Request User Name Connection Request Password Connection Request URL Enter the TR-069 user name for authentication with the auto-configuration server. Enter the TR-069 password for authentication with the auto-configuration server. Select a WAN interface through which the TR-069 traffic passes. If you select Any_WAN, you should also select the pre-configured WAN connection(s). Select Enable to show the SOAP messages on the console. Select this option to enable authentication when there is a connection request from the ACS. Enter the connection request user name. When the ACS makes a connection request to the ZyXEL Device, this user name is used to authenticate the ACS. Enter the connection request password. When the ACS makes a connection request to the ZyXEL Device, this password is used to authenticate the ACS. This shows the connection request URL. The ACS can use this URL to make a connection request to the ZyXEL Device. 246 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 27 Remote Management Table 100 Maintenance > Remote MGMT > TR-069 Client (continued) LABEL Apply DESCRIPTION Click Apply to save your changes. Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 27.3 The TR-064 Screen TR-064 is a LAN-Side DSL CPE Configuration protocol defined by the DSL Forum. TR-064 is built on top of UPnP. It allows the users to use a TR-064 compliant CPE management application on their computers from the LAN to discover the CPE and configure user-specific parameters, such as the username and password. Click Maintenance > Remote MGMT > TR-064 Client to open the following screen. Figure 124 Maintenance > Remote MGMT > TR-064 Client The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 101 Maintenance > Remote MGMT > TR-064 Client LABEL Enable TR064 DESCRIPTION Select the check box to activate management via TR-064 on the LAN. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 27.4 The SNMP Agent Screen Simple Network Management Protocol is a protocol used for exchanging management information between network devices. Your ZyXEL Device supports SNMP agent functionality, which allows a manager station to manage and monitor the ZyXEL Device through the network. The ZyXEL Device supports SNMP version one (SNMPv1) and version two (SNMPv2c). The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 247 Chapter 27 Remote Management Figure 125 SNMP Management Model An SNMP managed network consists of two main types of component: agents and a manager. An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed device (the ZyXEL Device). An agent translates the local management information from the managed device into a form compatible with SNMP. The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions. It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices. The managed devices contain object variables/managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a device. Examples of variables include such as number of packets received, node port status etc. A Management Information Base (MIB) is a collection of managed objects. SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects. SNMP itself is a simple request/response protocol based on the manager/agent model. The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations:
Get - Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent. GetNext - Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent. In SNMPv1, when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent, it initiates a Get operation, followed by a series of GetNext operations. Set - Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent. Trap - Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events. 248 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 27 Remote Management Click Maintenance > Remote MGMT > SNMP to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure the ZyXEL Device SNMP settings. Figure 126 Maintenance > Remote MGMT > SNMP The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 102 Maintenance > Remote MGMT > SNMP LABEL SNMP Agent DESCRIPTION Select Enable to allow a manager station to manage and monitor the ZyXEL Device through the network via SNMP. Otherwise, select Disable. Read Community Enter the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the management station. The default is public and allows all requests. Set Community Enter the Set community, which is the password for incoming Set requests from the management station. The default is public and allows all requests. System Name Enter the system name of the ZyXEL Device. System Location Specify the geographic location of the ZyXEL Device. System Contact Enter the name of the person in charge of the ZyXEL Device. Trap Manager IP Type the IP address of the station to send your SNMP traps to. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 249 Chapter 27 Remote Management 250 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide CHAPTER 28 Time Settings 28.1 Overview This chapter shows you how to configure system related settings, such as system time, password, name, the domain name and the inactivity timeout interval. 28.2 The Time Setting Screen To change your ZyXEL Devices time and date, click Maintenance > Time Setting. The screen appears as shown. Use this screen to configure the ZyXEL Devices time based on your local time zone. Figure 127 Maintenance > Time Setting P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 251 Chapter 28 Time Settings The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 103 Maintenance > Time Setting LABEL Current Date/Time DESCRIPTION System Time This field displays the time and fate of your ZyXEL Device. Each time you reload this page, the ZyXEL Device synchronizes the time and date with the time server. NTP Time Server First ~ Fifth NTP time server Select an NTP time server from the drop-down list box. Otherwise, select Other and enter the IP address or URL (up to 29 extended ASCII characters in length) of your time server. Select None if you dont want to configure the time server. Check with your ISP/network administrator if you are unsure of this information. Time zone offset Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). Daylight Saving Daylight Saving Time is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening. State Start rule:
End rule Select Enable if you use Daylight Saving Time. Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you enabled Daylight Saving. You can select a specific date in a particular month or a specific day of a specific week in a particular month. The Time field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:
Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of March. Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States, set the day to Second, Sunday, the month to March and the time to 2 in the Hour field. Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March. All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would set the day to Last, Sunday and the month to March. The time you select in the o'clock field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would select 2 in the Hour field because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1). Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you enabled Daylight Saving. You can select a specific date in a particular month or a specific day of a specific week in a particular month. The Time field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:
Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November. Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would set the day to First, Sunday, the month to November and the time to 2 in the Hour field. Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October. All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would set the day to Last, Sunday, and the month to October. The time you select in the o'clock field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would select 2 in the Hour field because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1). Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 252 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide CHAPTER 29 Logs Setting 29.1 Overview You can configure where the ZyXEL Device sends logs and which logs and/or immediate alerts the ZyXEL Device records in the Logs Setting screen. 29.2 The Logs Setting Screen To change your ZyXEL Devices log settings, click Maintenance > Logs Setting. The screen appears as shown. Figure 128 Maintenance > Logs Setting P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 253 Chapter 29 Logs Setting The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 104 Maintenance > Logs Setting LABEL Syslog Logging DESCRIPTION The ZyXEL Device sends a log to an external syslog server. Active Mode Select the Active check box to enable syslog logging. Select the syslog destination from the drop-down list box. If you select Remote, the log(s) will be sent to a remote syslog server. If you select Local File, the log(s) will be saved in a local file. If you want to send the log(s) to a remote syslog server and save it in a local file, select Local File and Remote. Syslog Server IP Address Enter the server name or IP address of the syslog server that will log the selected categories of logs. UDP Port Enter the port number used by the syslog server. E-mail Log Settings Mail Server Enter the server name or the IP address of the mail server for the e-mail addresses specified below. If this field is left blank, logs and alert messages will not be sent via E-mail. System Log Mail Subject Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the system log e-mail message that the ZyXEL Device sends. Security Log Mail Subject Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the security log e-mail message that the ZyXEL Device sends. From Specify where the logs are sent from. Send Log to Send Alarm to The ZyXEL Device sends logs to the e-mail address specified in this field. If this field is left blank, the ZyXEL Device does not send logs via E-mail. Alerts are real-time notifications that are sent as soon as an event, such as a DoS attack, system error, or forbidden web access attempt occurs. Enter the E-mail address where the alert messages will be sent. Alerts include system errors, attacks and attempted access to blocked web sites. If this field is left blank, alert messages will not be sent via E-mail. Alarm Interval Specify how often the alarm should be updated. Allowed Capacity Before Email Set what percent of the ZyXEL Devices log storage space can be filled before the ZyXEL Device sends a log e-mail. SMTP Authentication SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) is the message-exchange standard for the Internet. SMTP enables you to move messages from one E-mail server to another. Select the check box to activate SMTP authentication. If mail server authentication is needed but this feature is disabled, you will not receive the E-mail logs. User Name Enter the user name (up to 32 characters) (usually the user name of a mail account). Password Enter the password associated with the user name above. Clear log after sending mail Select this to delete all the logs after the ZyXEL Device sends an E-mail of the logs. Active Log and Alert System Log Select the categories of system logs that you want to record. Security Log Select the categories of security logs that you want to record. Send immediate alert Select log categories for which you want the ZyXEL Device to send E-mail alerts immediately. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 254 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 29.2.1 Example E-mail Log Chapter 29 Logs Setting An "End of Log" message displays for each mail in which a complete log has been sent. The following is an example of a log sent by e-mail. You may edit the subject title. The date format here is Day-Month-Year. The date format here is Month-Day-Year. The time format is Hour-Minute-Second.
"End of Log" message shows that a complete log has been sent. Figure 129 E-mail Log Example Subject:
Firewall Alert From Date:
Fri, 07 Apr 2000 10:05:42 From:
user@zyxel.com To:
user@zyxel.com 1|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1 To:192.168.1.255 |default policy |forward
| 09:54:03 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,00> |
2|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.131 To:192.168.1.255 |default policy |forward
| 09:54:17 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,00> |
3|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.6 To:10.10.10.10 |match |forward
| 09:54:19 |UDP src port:03516 dest port:00053 |<1,01> |
..{snip}.. .{snip}.. 126|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1 To:192.168.1.255 |match |forward
| 10:05:00 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02> |
127|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.131 To:192.168.1.255 |match |forward
| 10:05:17 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02> |
128|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1 To:192.168.1.255 |match |forward
| 10:05:30 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02> |
End of Firewall Log P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 255 Chapter 29 Logs Setting 256 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide CHAPTER 30 Firmware Upgrade 30.1 Overview This chapter explains how to upload new firmware to your ZyXEL Device. You can download new firmware releases from your nearest ZyXEL FTP site (or www.zyxel.com) to use to upgrade your devices performance. Only use firmware for your devices specific model. Refer to the label on the bottom of your ZyXEL Device. 30.2 The Firmware Screen Click Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade to open the following screen. The upload process uses HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) and may take up to two minutes. After a successful upload, the system will reboot. Do NOT turn off the ZyXEL Device while firmware upload is in progress!
Figure 130 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 105 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade LABEL Restore default settings after firmware upgrade DESCRIPTION Select this if you want the ZyXEL Device to restore to its default settings after firmware upgrade. Current Firmware Version File Path This is the present Firmware version and the date created. Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse ... to find it. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 257 Chapter 30 Firmware Upgrade Table 105 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade (continued) LABEL Browse... DESCRIPTION Click this to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them. Upload Click this to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes. After you see the firmware updating screen, wait two minutes before logging into the ZyXEL Device again. Figure 131 Firmware Uploading The ZyXEL Device automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop. Figure 132 Network Temporarily Disconnected After two minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the Status screen. If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click OK to go back to the Firmware Upgrade screen. Figure 133 Error Message 258 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide CHAPTER 31 Configuration 31.1 Overview The Configuration screen allows you to backup and restore device configurations. You can also reset your device settings back to the factory default. 31.2 The Configuration Screen Click Maintenance > Configuration. Information related to factory defaults, backup configuration, and restoring configuration appears in this screen, as shown next. Figure 134 Maintenance > Configuration Backup Configuration Backup Configuration allows you to back up (save) the ZyXEL Devices current configuration to a file on your computer. Once your ZyXEL Device is configured and functioning properly, it is highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes. The backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings. Click Backup to save the ZyXEL Devices current configuration to your computer. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 259 Chapter 31 Configuration Restore Configuration Restore Configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your computer to your ZyXEL Device. Table 106 Restore Configuration LABEL File Path DESCRIPTION Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse ... to find it. Browse... Click this to find the file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.ZIP) files before you can upload them. Upload Click this to begin the upload process. Do not turn off the ZyXEL Device while configuration file upload is in progress. After the ZyXEL Device configuration has been restored successfully, the login screen appears. Login again to restart the ZyXEL Device. The ZyXEL Device automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop. Figure 135 Network Temporarily Disconnected If you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default device IP address (192.168.1.1). See Appendix A on page 279 for details on how to set up your computers IP address. If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click OK to go back to the Configuration screen. Figure 136 Configuration Upload Error 260 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 31 Configuration Reset to Factory Defaults Click the Reset button to clear all user-entered configuration information and return the ZyXEL Device to its factory defaults. The following warning screen appears. Figure 137 Reset Warning Message Figure 138 Reset In Process Message You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory defaults of your ZyXEL Device. Refer to Section 1.6 on page 26 for more information on the RESET button. 31.3 The Reboot Screen System restart allows you to reboot the ZyXEL Device remotely without turning the power off. You may need to do this if the ZyXEL Device hangs, for example. Click Maintenance > Reboot. Click Reboot to have the ZyXEL Device reboot. This does not affect the ZyXEL Device's configuration. Figure 139 Maintenance > Reboot P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 261 CHAPTER 32 Diagnostic 32.1 Overview The Diagnostic screens display information to help you identify problems with the ZyXEL Device. The route between a CO VDSL switch and one of its CPE may go through switches owned by independent organizations. A connectivity fault point generally takes time to discover and impacts subscribers network access. In order to eliminate the management and maintenance efforts, IEEE 802.1ag is a Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) specification which allows network administrators to identify and manage connection faults. Through discovery and verification of the path, CFM can detect, analyze and isolate connectivity faults in bridged LANs. 32.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup screen lets you ping an IP address or trace the route packets take to a host (Section 32.3 on page 263). The 802.1ag screen lets you perform CFM actions (Section 32.5 on page 265). The OAM Ping Test screen lets you send an ATM OAM (Operation, Administration and Maintenance) packet to verify the connectivity of a specific PVC. (Section 32.5 on page 265). 32.2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. How CFM Works A Maintenance Association (MA) defines a VLAN and associated Maintenance End Point (MEP) ports on the device under a Maintenance Domain (MD) level. An MEP port has the ability to send Connectivity Check Messages (CCMs) and get other MEP ports information from neighbor devices CCMs within an MA. CFM provides two tests to discover connectivity faults. Loopback test - checks if the MEP port receives its Loop Back Response (LBR) from its target after it sends the Loop Back Message (LBM). If no response is received, there might be a connectivity fault between them. Link trace test - provides additional connectivity fault analysis to get more information on where the fault is. If an MEP port does not respond to the source MEP, this may indicate a fault. Administrators can take further action to check and resume services from the fault according to the line connectivity status report. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 262 32.3 Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup Use this screen to ping, traceroute, or nslookup an IP address. Click Maintenance > Diagnostic >
Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup to open the screen shown next. Figure 140 Maintenance > Diagnostic > Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup Chapter 32 Diagnostic The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 107 Maintenance > Diagnostic > Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup LABEL URL or IP Address DESCRIPTION Type the IP address of a computer that you want to perform ping, traceroute, or nslookup in order to test a connection. Ping Click this to ping the IP address that you entered. TraceRoute Nslookup Click this button to perform the traceroute function. This determines the path a packet takes to the specified computer. Click this button to perform a DNS lookup on the IP address of a computer you enter. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 263 Chapter 32 Diagnostic 32.4 802.1ag Click Maintenance > Diagnostic > 8.2.1ag to open the following screen. Use this screen to perform CFM actions. Figure 141 802.1ag The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 108 Maintenance > Diagnostic > 802.1ag LABEL 802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management DESCRIPTION Maintenance Domain (MD) Level Select a level (0-7) under which you want to create an MA. Destination MAC Address Enter the target devices MAC address to which the ZyXEL Device performs a CFM loopback test. 802.1Q VLAN ID Type a VLAN ID (0-4095) for this MA. VDSL Traffic Type Loopback Message
(LBM) This shows how many Loop Back Messages (LBMs) are sent and if there is any inorder or outorder Loop Back Response (LBR) received from a remote MEP. Linktrace Message
(LTM) Send Loopback This shows the destination MAC address in the Link Trace Response (LTR). Click this button to have the selected MEP send the LBM (Loop Back Message) to a specified remote end point. Send Linktrace Click this button to have the selected MEP send the LTMs (Link Trace Messages) to a specified remote end point. 264 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 32.5 OAM Ping Test Chapter 32 Diagnostic Click Maintenance > Diagnostic > OAM Ping Test to open the screen shown next. Use this screen to perform an OAM (Operation, Administration and Maintenance) F4 or F5 loopback test on a PVC. The ZyXEL Device sends an OAM F4 or F5 packet to the DSLAM or ATM switch and then returns it to the ZyXEL Device. The test result then displays in the text box. ATM sets up virtual circuits over which end systems communicate. The terminology for virtual circuits is as follows:
Virtual Channel (VC) Logical connections between ATM devices Virtual Path (VP) A bundle of virtual channels Virtual Circuits A series of virtual paths between circuit end points Figure 142 Virtual Circuit Topology Think of a virtual path as a cable that contains a bundle of wires. The cable connects two points and wires within the cable provide individual circuits between the two points. In an ATM cell header, a VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) identifies a link formed by a virtual path; a VCI (Virtual Channel Identifier) identifies a channel within a virtual path. A series of virtual paths make up a virtual circuit. F4 cells operate at the virtual path (VP) level, while F5 cells operate at the virtual channel (VC) level. F4 cells use the same VPI as the user data cells on VP connections, but use different predefined VCI values. F5 cells use the same VPI and VCI as the user data cells on the VC connections, and are distinguished from data cells by a predefinded Payload Type Identifier (PTI) in the cell header. Both F4 flows and F5 flows are bidirectional and have two types. segment F4 flows (VCI=3) end-to-end F4 flows (VCI=4) segment F5 flows (PTI=100) end-to-end F5 flows (PTI=101) OAM F4 or F5 tests are used to check virtual path or virtual channel availability between two DSL devices. Segment flows are terminated at the connecting point which terminates a VP or VC segment. End-to-end flows are terminated at the end point of a VP or VC connection, where an ATM link is terminated. Segment loopback tests allow you to verify integrity of a PVC to the nearest neighboring ATM device. End-to-end loopback tests allow you to verify integrity of an end-to-end PVC. Note: The DSLAM to which the ZyXEL Device is connected must also support ATM F4 and/
or F5 to use this test. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 265 Chapter 32 Diagnostic Note: This screen is available only when you configure an ATM layer-2 interface. Figure 143 Maintenance > Diagnostic > OAM Ping Test The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 109 Maintenance > Diagnostic > OAM Ping Test LABEL DESCRIPTION Select a PVC on which you want to perform the loopback test. F4 segment Press this to perform an OAM F4 segment loopback test. F4 end-end Press this to perform an OAM F4 end-to-end loopback test. F5 segment Press this to perform an OAM F5 segment loopback test. F5 end-end Press this to perform an OAM F5 end-to-end loopback test. 266 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide CHAPTER 33 Troubleshooting This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential problems are divided into the following categories. Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs ZyXEL Device Access and Login Internet Access 33.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs The ZyXEL Device does not turn on. None of the LEDs turn on. 1 Make sure the ZyXEL Device is turned on. 2 Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the ZyXEL Device. 3 Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the ZyXEL Device and plugged in to an appropriate power source. Make sure the power source is turned on. 4 5 Turn the ZyXEL Device off and on. If the problem continues, contact the vendor. One of the LEDs does not behave as expected. 1 Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Section 1.5 on page 25. 2 3 4 5 Check the hardware connections. Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables. Turn the ZyXEL Device off and on. If the problem continues, contact the vendor. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 267 Chapter 33 Troubleshooting 33.2 ZyXEL Device Access and Login I forgot the IP address for the ZyXEL Device. 1 2 3 The default LAN IP address is 192.168.1.1. If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, you might get the IP address of the ZyXEL Device by looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer. To do this in most Windows computers, click Start > Run, enter cmd, and then enter ipconfig. The IP address of the Default Gateway might be the IP address of the ZyXEL Device (it depends on the network), so enter this IP address in your Internet browser. If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 1.6 on page 26. I forgot the password. 1 2 The default admin password is 1234. If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 1.6 on page 26. I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator. 1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address. The default IP address is 192.168.1.1. If you changed the IP address (Section 8.2 on page 117), use the new IP address. If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting suggestions for I forgot the IP address for the ZyXEL Device. 2 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See Section 1.5 on page 25. 3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has JavaScript and Java enabled. See Appendix C on page 309. 4 5 268 Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the ZyXEL Device with the default IP address. See Section 1.6 on page 26. If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions. Advanced Suggestions P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 33 Troubleshooting Make sure you have logged out of any earlier management sessions using the same user account even if they were through a different interface or using a different browser. Try to access the ZyXEL Device using another service, such as Telnet. If you can access the ZyXEL Device, check the remote management settings and firewall rules to find out why the ZyXEL Device does not respond to HTTP. If your computer is connected to the WAN port or is connected wirelessly, use a computer that is connected to an ETHERNET port.\
I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the ZyXEL Device. 1 Make sure you have entered the password correctly. The default admin password is 1234. The field is case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on. 2 3 4 You cannot log in to the web configurator while someone is using Telnet to access the ZyXEL Device. Log out of the ZyXEL Device in the other session, or ask the person who is logged in to log out. Turn the ZyXEL Device off and on. If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 33.1 on page 267. I cannot Telnet to the ZyXEL Device. 1 2 See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser. Check the service control settings for Telnet. See Chapter 20 on page 223. I cannot use FTP to upload / download the configuration file. / I cannot use FTP to upload new firmware. 1 2 See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser. Check the service control settings for FTP. See Chapter 20 on page 223. 33.3 Internet Access I cannot access the Internet. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 269 Chapter 33 Troubleshooting 1 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide for hardware connections information and Section 1.5 on page 25 for LED behaviors. 2 Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly in the Network Settings >
Broadband screen. These fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on. 3 If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure that you enabled the wireless LAN in the ZyXEL Device and your wireless client and that the wireless settings in the wireless client are the same as the settings in the ZyXEL Device. 4 Disconnect all the cables from your device, and follow the directions in the Quick Start Guide to connect them again. 5 If the problem continues, contact your ISP. I cannot access the Internet through a DSL connection. 1 Make sure you have the DSL port connected to a telephone jack (or the DSL or modem jack on a splitter if you have one). 2 Make sure you configured a proper DSL WAN interface (Network Settings > Broadband screen) with the Internet account information provided by your ISP and that it is enabled. 3 4 Check that the LAN interface you are connected to is in the same interface group as the DSL connection (Network Settings > Interface Group). If you set up a WAN connection using bridging service, make sure you turn off the DHCP feature in the LAN screen to have the clients get WAN IP addresses directly from your ISPs DHCP server. I cannot access the Internet through an Ethernet WAN connection. 1 Make sure you have the ETHERNET WAN port connected to a broadband modem or router in your network. 2 Make sure you configured a proper Ethernet WAN interface (Network Settings > Broadband screen) with the Internet account information provided by your ISP and that it is enabled. 3 4 Check that the LAN interface you are connected to is in the same interface group as the Ethernet WAN connection (Network Settings > Interface Group). If you set up a WAN connection using bridging service, make sure you turn off the DHCP feature in the LAN screen to have the clients get WAN IP addresses directly from your ISPs DHCP server. I cannot connect to the Internet using a second DSL connection. 270 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 33 Troubleshooting ADSL and VDSL connections cannot work at the same time. You can only use one type of DSL connection, either ADSL or VDSL connection at one time. I cannot access the Internet anymore. I had access to the Internet (with the ZyXEL Device), but my Internet connection is not available anymore. 1 2 3 4 Your session with the ZyXEL Device may have expired. Try logging into the ZyXEL Device again. Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide for hardware connections information and Section 1.5 on page 25 for LED behaviors. Turn the ZyXEL Device off and on. If the problem continues, contact your ISP. 33.4 Wireless Internet Access What factors may cause intermittent or unstabled wireless connection? How can I solve this problem?
The following factors may cause interference:
Obstacles: walls, ceilings, furniture, and so on. Building Materials: metal doors, aluminum studs. Electrical devices: microwaves, monitors, electric motors, cordless phones, and other wireless devices. To optimize the speed and quality of your wireless connection, you can:
Move your wireless device closer to the AP if the signal strength is low. Reduce wireless interference that may be caused by other wireless networks or surrounding wireless electronics such as cordless phones. Place the AP where there are minimum obstacles (such as walls and ceilings) between the AP and the wireless client. Reduce the number of wireless clients connecting to the same AP simultaneously, or add additional APs if necessary. Try closing some programs that use the Internet, especially peer-to-peer applications. If the wireless client is sending or receiving a lot of information, it may have too many programs open that use the Internet. What wireless security modes does my ZyXEL Device support?
P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 271 Chapter 33 Troubleshooting Wireless security is vital to your network. It protects communications between wireless stations, access points and the wired network. The available security modes in your ZyXEL device are as follows:
WPA2-PSK: (recommended) This uses a pre-shared key with the WPA2 standard. WPA-PSK: This has the device use either WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK depending on which security mode the wireless client uses. WPA2: WPA2 (IEEE 802.11i) is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption, authentication and key management than WPA. It requires the use of a RADIUS server and is mostly used in business networks. WPA: Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard. It requires the use of a RADIUS server and is mostly used in business networks. WEP: Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless stations and the access points to keep network communications private. 272 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide CHAPTER 34 Product Specifications The following tables summarize the ZyXEL Devices hardware and firmware features. 34.1 Hardware Specifications Table 110 Hardware Specifications Dimensions 210 (L) x 154 (W) x 40 (H) mm (without external antenna) Weight 495g (without external antenna) Power Adaptor Output 12 V 1.5 A Power Adaptor Input 100-240V AC, 50/60Hz RESET Button Restores factory defaults WLAN/WPS Button If the wireless network is turned off, press the WLAN/WPS button on the front of the ZyXEL Device for two seconds. Once the WLAN/WPS LED turns green, the wireless network is active. While the WLAN/WPS LED is green press the WLAN/WPS button for five seconds and release it to enable WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup). To turn off the wireless network, press the WLAN/WPS button on the front of the ZyXEL Device for one to five seconds. The WLAN/WPS LED turns off when the wireless network is off. Antennas Two: One detachable external, 2dBi antenna and one internal, 2dBi antenna. Built-in Switch Four auto-negotiating, auto MDI/MDI-X 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 Ethernet ports DSL Port One RJ-11 connector for DSL over POTS Gigabit Ethernet WAN Port One RJ-45 connector for GBE WAN HomePNA Coaxial Port One port for HPNA v3.1 access, coax F type connector USB Ports One USB v2.0 port for file sharing Operation Temperature 0 C ~ 40 C Storage Temperature
-20 ~ 60 C Operation Humidity 20% ~ 85% RH (non-condensing) Storage Humidity 20% ~ 90% RH (non-condensing) P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 273 Chapter 34 Product Specifications 34.2 Firmware Specifications Table 111 Firmware Specifications 192.168.1.1 Default IP Address Default Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 (24 bits) Default User Name Default Password admin 1234 DHCP Server IP Pool 192.168.1.2 to 192.168.1.254 Static Routes 16 Device Management Use the web configurator to easily configure the rich range of features on the ZyXEL Device. Wireless Functionality
(wireless devices only) Allow the IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g and/or IEEE 802.11n wireless clients to connect to the ZyXEL Device wirelessly. Enable wireless security
(WEP, WPA(2), WPA(2)-PSK) and/or MAC filtering to protect your wireless network. Firmware Upgrade Download new firmware (when available) from the web site and use the web configurator to put it on the ZyXEL Device. Configuration Backup &
Restoration HomePNA (Home Phoneline Networking Alliance, also known as HPNA) 3.1 Port Forwarding DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Note: Only upload firmware for your specific model!
Make a copy of the ZyXEL Devices configuration. You can put it back on the ZyXEL Device later if you decide to revert back to an earlier configuration. Extend your Internet connection to the coaxial outlets in your house. HPNA is a home networking technology for carrying data over existing coaxial cables and telephone wiring. If you have a server (mail or web server for example) on your network, you can use this feature to let people access it from the Internet. Use this feature to have the ZyXEL Device assign IP addresses, an IP default gateway and DNS servers to computers on your network. Your device can also act as a surrogate DHCP server (DHCP Relay) where it relays IP address assignment from the actual real DHCP server to the clients. Dynamic DNS Support With Dynamic DNS (Domain Name System) support, you can use a fixed URL with a dynamic IP address. You must register for this service with a Dynamic DNS service provider. IP Multicast Time and Date Logs IP multicast is used to send traffic to a specific group of computers. The ZyXEL Device supports versions 2 and 3 of IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) used to join multicast groups (see RFC 2236). Get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your ZyXEL Device. You can also set the time manually. These dates and times are then used in logs. Use logs for troubleshooting. You can send logs from the ZyXEL Device to an external syslog server. Universal Plug and Play
(UPnP) A UPnP-enabled device can dynamically join a network, obtain an IP address and convey its capabilities to other devices on the network. QoS (Quality of Service) You can efficiently manage traffic on your network by reserving bandwidth and giving priority to certain types of traffic and/or to particular computers. 274 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 34 Product Specifications Table 111 Firmware Specifications (continued) Remote Management This allows you to decide whether a service (HTTPS or FTP traffic for example) from a computer on a network (LAN or WAN for example) can access the ZyXEL Device. PPPoE Support
(RFC2516) PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet) emulates a dial-up connection. It allows your ISP to use their existing network configuration with newer broadband technologies such as ADSL. The PPPoE driver on your device is transparent to the computers on the LAN, which see only Ethernet and are not aware of PPPoE thus saving you from having to manage PPPoE clients on individual computers. Other PPPoE Features PPPoE idle time out PPPoE dial on demand Packet Filters VDSL Standards ADSL Standards Your devices packet filtering function allows added network security and management. ITU-T G.993.2 (VDSL2) ITU-T G.993.1 (VDSL1) ITU-T G.994.1 (G.hs) ITU-T G.997.1 Pass TR-114(Still Need test for Single pair) Support VDSL band plan, Annex A, Annex B, 997, 998 Support VDSL profiles, 8a/b/c/d, 12a/b and 17a Support U0 band for long reach Maximum data rate (DS/US): 100Mbps/45Mbps Rate adaption SRA (Seamless Rate Adaption) UPBO (Upstream power back-off) VDSL OAM communication channels Erasure and Broadcom PhyR PHY Level Retransmission Technology INP value up to 16 Trellis coding PTM mode G.992.1(G.dmt) Annex A, B compliant G.992.2(G.lite), Annex A compliant ANSI T1.413 compliant G.992.3(ADSL2) compliant, Annex A, B, L and M G.992.5(ADSL2+) compliant, Annex A, B, and M I.432 ATM physical layer compliant Reach-Extended ADSL (RE ADSL), SRA (Seamless Rate Adaptation) Rate adaptation ADSL physical connection ATM AAL5 (ATM Adaptation Layer type 5) Support multi-protocol over AAL5 (RFC2684/1483) MAC Encapsulation Routing Support VC-based and LLC-based multiplexing Support up to 8 PVCs ATM traffic shaping (CBR, VBR-rt/nrt, UBR ) Upstream power backoff (UPBO) Broadcom PhyR, PHY Level Retransmission Technology Broadcom Nitro mode, ATM header compression PPP over ATM AAL5 (RFC2364) PPPoE (RFC 2516) I.610 F4/F5 OAM P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 275 Chapter 34 Product Specifications Table 111 Firmware Specifications (continued) Other Protocol Support PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) link layer protocol Transparent bridging for unsupported network layer protocols RIP I/RIP II ICMP ATM QoS IP Multicasting IGMP v2 and v3 IGMP Proxy Management Embedded Web Configurator Remote Firmware Upgrade Embedded FTP/TFTP Server for firmware upgrade and configuration file backup and restore Syslog TR-069 TR-064 The following list, which is not exhaustive, illustrates the standards supported in the ZyXEL Device. Table 112 Standards Supported STANDARD RFC 1058 DESCRIPTION RIP-1 (Routing Information Protocol) RFC 1112 RFC 1305 RFC 1483 RFC 1631 RFC 1661 RFC 1723 RFC 2236 RFC 2364 RFC 2516 RFC 2684 RFC 2766 IEEE 802.11 IEEE 802.11b IEEE 802.11g IEEE 802.11d IGMP v1 Network Time Protocol (NTP version 3) Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 IP Network Address Translator (NAT) The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) RIP-2 (Routing Information Protocol) Internet Group Management Protocol, Version 2. PPP over AAL5 (PPP over ATM over ADSL) A Method for Transmitting PPP Over Ethernet (PPPoE) Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 Network Address Translation - Protocol Also known by the brand Wi-Fi, denotes a set of Wireless LAN/WLAN standards developed by working group 11 of the IEEE LAN/MAN Standards Committee (IEEE 802). Uses the 2.4 gigahertz (GHz) band Uses the 2.4 gigahertz (GHz) band Standard for Local and Metropolitan Area Networks: Media Access Control (MAC) Bridges IEEE 802.11x Port Based Network Access Control. IEEE 802.11e QoS IEEE 802.11 e Wireless LAN for Quality of Service ANSI T1.413, Issue 2 Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL) standard. G dmt(G.992.1) G.992.1 Asymmetrical Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL) Transceivers ITU G.992.1 (G.DMT) ITU standard for ADSL using discrete multitone modulation. 276 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Chapter 34 Product Specifications Table 112 Standards Supported (continued) STANDARD ITU G.992.2 (G. Lite) DESCRIPTION ITU standard for ADSL using discrete multitone modulation. ITU G.992.3 (G.dmt.bis) ITU standard (also referred to as ADSL2) that extends the capability of basic ADSL in data rates. ITU G.992.4 (G.lite.bis) ITU standard (also referred to as ADSL2) that extends the capability of basic ADSL in data rates. ITU G.992.5 (ADSL2+) ITU standard (also referred to as ADSL2+) that extends the capability of basic ADSL by doubling the number of downstream bits. ITU-T G.993.2 (VDSL2) ITU standard that defines VDSL2. TR-069 TR-064 DSL Forum Standard for CPE Wan Management. DSL Forum LAN-Side DSL CPE Configuration P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 277 Chapter 34 Product Specifications 278 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide APPENDIX A Setting up Your Computers IP Address All computers must have a 10M or 100M Ethernet adapter card and TCP/IP installed. Windows 95/98/Me/NT/2000/XP/Vista, Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems and all versions of UNIX/LINUX include the software components you need to install and use TCP/IP on your computer. Windows 3.1 requires the purchase of a third-party TCP/IP application package. TCP/IP should already be installed on computers using Windows NT/2000/XP, Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems. After the appropriate TCP/IP components are installed, configure the TCP/IP settings in order to
"communicate" with your network. If you manually assign IP information instead of using dynamic assignment, make sure that your computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet as the ZyXEL Devices LAN port. Windows 95/98/Me Click Start, Settings, Control Panel and double-click the Network icon to open the Network window. Figure 144 WIndows 95/98/Me: Network: Configuration P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 279 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Installing Components The Network window Configuration tab displays a list of installed components. You need a network adapter, the TCP/IP protocol and Client for Microsoft Networks. If you need the adapter:
In the Network window, click Add. Select Adapter and then click Add. Select the manufacturer and model of your network adapter and then click OK. If you need TCP/IP:
In the Network window, click Add. Select Protocol and then click Add. Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers. Select TCP/IP from the list of network protocols and then click OK. If you need Client for Microsoft Networks:
Click Add. Select Client and then click Add. Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers. Select Client for Microsoft Networks from the list of network clients and then click OK. Restart your computer so the changes you made take effect. 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 Configuring 1 2 280 In the Network window Configuration tab, select your network adapter's TCP/IP entry and click Properties Click the IP Address tab. If your IP address is dynamic, select Obtain an IP address automatically. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address If you have a static IP address, select Specify an IP address and type your information into the IP Address and Subnet Mask fields. Figure 145 Windows 95/98/Me: TCP/IP Properties: IP Address 3 Click the DNS Configuration tab. If you do not know your DNS information, select Disable DNS. If you know your DNS information, select Enable DNS and type the information in the fields below (you may not need to fill them all in). Figure 146 Windows 95/98/Me: TCP/IP Properties: DNS Configuration P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 281 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address 4 5 6 7 Click the Gateway tab. If you do not know your gateways IP address, remove previously installed gateways. If you have a gateway IP address, type it in the New gateway field and click Add. Click OK to save and close the TCP/IP Properties window. Click OK to close the Network window. Insert the Windows CD if prompted. Turn on your ZyXEL Device and restart your computer when prompted. Verifying Settings 1 2 3 Click Start and then Run. In the Run window, type "winipcfg" and then click OK to open the IP Configuration window. Select your network adapter. You should see your computer's IP address, subnet mask and default gateway. Windows 2000/NT/XP The following example figures use the default Windows XP GUI theme. 1 Click start (Start in Windows 2000/NT), Settings, Control Panel. Figure 147 Windows XP: Start Menu 282 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address 2 In the Control Panel, double-click Network Connections (Network and Dial-up Connections in Windows 2000/NT). Figure 148 Windows XP: Control Panel 3 Right-click Local Area Connection and then click Properties. Figure 149 Windows XP: Control Panel: Network Connections: Properties P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 283 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address 4 Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) (under the General tab in Win XP) and then click Properties. Figure 150 Windows XP: Local Area Connection Properties 5 The Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window opens (the General tab in Windows XP). If you have a dynamic IP address click Obtain an IP address automatically. If you have a static IP address click Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields. 284 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Click Advanced. Figure 151 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties 6 If you do not know your gateway's IP address, remove any previously installed gateways in the IP Settings tab and click OK. Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses:
In the IP Settings tab, in IP addresses, click Add. In TCP/IP Address, type an IP address in IP address and a subnet mask in Subnet mask, and then click Add. Repeat the above two steps for each IP address you want to add. Configure additional default gateways in the IP Settings tab by clicking Add in Default gateways. In TCP/IP Gateway Address, type the IP address of the default gateway in Gateway. To manually configure a default metric (the number of transmission hops), clear the Automatic metric check box and type a metric in Metric. Click Add. Repeat the previous three steps for each default gateway you want to add. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 285 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Click OK when finished. Figure 152 Windows XP: Advanced TCP/IP Properties 7 In the Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window (the General tab in Windows XP):
Click Obtain DNS server address automatically if you do not know your DNS server IP address(es). If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click Use the following DNS server addresses, and type them in the Preferred DNS server and Alternate DNS server fields. 286 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address If you have previously configured DNS servers, click Advanced and then the DNS tab to order them. Figure 153 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties 8 9 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window. Click Close (OK in Windows 2000/NT) to close the Local Area Connection Properties window. 10 Close the Network Connections window (Network and Dial-up Connections in Windows 2000/NT). 11 Turn on your ZyXEL Device and restart your computer (if prompted). Verifying Settings 1 2 Click Start, All Programs, Accessories and then Command Prompt. In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You can also open Network Connections, right-click a network connection, click Status and then click the Support tab. Windows Vista This section shows screens from Windows Vista Enterprise Version 6.0. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 287 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address 1 2 Click the Start icon, Control Panel. Figure 154 Windows Vista: Start Menu In the Control Panel, double-click Network and Internet. Figure 155 Windows Vista: Control Panel 3 Click Network and Sharing Center. Figure 156 Windows Vista: Network And Internet 288 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address 4 Click Manage network connections. Figure 157 Windows Vista: Network and Sharing Center 5 Right-click Local Area Connection and then click Properties. Note: During this procedure, click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen saying that it needs your permission to continue. Figure 158 Windows Vista: Network and Sharing Center P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 289 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address 6 Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and click Properties. Figure 159 Windows Vista: Local Area Connection Properties 7 The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window opens (the General tab). If you have a dynamic IP address click Obtain an IP address automatically. If you have a static IP address click Use the following IP address and fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields. 290 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Click Advanced. Figure 160 Windows Vista: Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties 8 If you do not know your gateway's IP address, remove any previously installed gateways in the IP Settings tab and click OK. Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses:
In the IP Settings tab, in IP addresses, click Add. In TCP/IP Address, type an IP address in IP address and a subnet mask in Subnet mask, and then click Add. Repeat the above two steps for each IP address you want to add. Configure additional default gateways in the IP Settings tab by clicking Add in Default gateways. In TCP/IP Gateway Address, type the IP address of the default gateway in Gateway. To manually configure a default metric (the number of transmission hops), clear the Automatic metric check box and type a metric in Metric. Click Add. Repeat the previous three steps for each default gateway you want to add. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 291 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Click OK when finished. Figure 161 Windows Vista: Advanced TCP/IP Properties 9 In the Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window, (the General tab):
Click Obtain DNS server address automatically if you do not know your DNS server IP address(es). If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click Use the following DNS server addresses, and type them in the Preferred DNS server and Alternate DNS server fields. 292 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address If you have previously configured DNS servers, click Advanced and then the DNS tab to order them. Figure 162 Windows Vista: Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties 10 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window. 11 Click Close to close the Local Area Connection Properties window. 12 Close the Network Connections window. 13 Turn on your ZyXEL Device and restart your computer (if prompted). Verifying Settings 1 2 Click Start, All Programs, Accessories and then Command Prompt. In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You can also open Network Connections, right-click a network connection, click Status and then click the Support tab. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 293 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Macintosh OS 8/9 1 Click the Apple menu, Control Panel and double-click TCP/IP to open the TCP/IP Control Panel. Figure 163 Macintosh OS 8/9: Apple Menu 294 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address 2 Select Ethernet built-in from the Connect via list. Figure 164 Macintosh OS 8/9: TCP/IP 3 4 5 6 7 For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP Server from the Configure: list. For statically assigned settings, do the following:
From the Configure box, select Manually. Type your IP address in the IP Address box. Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box. Type the IP address of your ZyXEL Device in the Router address box. Close the TCP/IP Control Panel. Click Save if prompted, to save changes to your configuration. Turn on your ZyXEL Device and restart your computer (if prompted). Verifying Settings Check your TCP/IP properties in the TCP/IP Control Panel window. Macintosh OS X 1 Click the Apple menu, and click System Preferences to open the System Preferences window. Figure 165 Macintosh OS X: Apple Menu 2 Click Network in the icon bar. Select Automatic from the Location list. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 295 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Select Built-in Ethernet from the Show list. Click the TCP/IP tab. 3 For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP from the Configure list. Figure 166 Macintosh OS X: Network 4 5 6 For statically assigned settings, do the following:
From the Configure box, select Manually. Type your IP address in the IP Address box. Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box. Type the IP address of your ZyXEL Device in the Router address box. Click Apply Now and close the window. Turn on your ZyXEL Device and restart your computer (if prompted). Verifying Settings Check your TCP/IP properties in the Network window. 296 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Linux This section shows you how to configure your computers TCP/IP settings in Red Hat Linux 9.0. Procedure, screens and file location may vary depending on your Linux distribution and release version. Note: Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator. Using the K Desktop Environment (KDE) Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address using the KDE. 1 Click the Red Hat button (located on the bottom left corner), select System Setting and click Network. Figure 167 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: Devices P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 297 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address 2 Double-click on the profile of the network card you wish to configure. The Ethernet Device General screen displays as shown. Figure 168 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Ethernet Device: General If you have a dynamic IP address, click Automatically obtain IP address settings with and select dhcp from the drop down list. If you have a static IP address, click Statically set IP Addresses and fill in the Address, Subnet mask, and Default Gateway Address fields. 3 4 Click OK to save the changes and close the Ethernet Device General screen. If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click the DNS tab in the Network Configuration screen. Enter the DNS server information in the fields provided. Figure 169 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: DNS 5 Click the Devices tab. 298 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Click the Activate button to apply the changes. The following screen displays. Click Yes to save the changes in all screens. Figure 170 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: Activate After the network card restart process is complete, make sure the Status is Active in the Network Configuration screen. 6 7 Using Configuration Files Follow the steps below to edit the network configuration files and set your computer IP address. 1 Assuming that you have only one network card on the computer, locate the ifconfig-eth0 configuration file (where eth0 is the name of the Ethernet card). Open the configuration file with any plain text editor. If you have a dynamic IP address, enter dhcp in the BOOTPROTO= field. The following figure shows an example. Figure 171 Red Hat 9.0: Dynamic IP Address Setting in ifconfig-eth0 DEVICE=eth0 ONBOOT=yes BOOTPROTO=dhcp USERCTL=no PEERDNS=yes TYPE=Ethernet If you have a static IP address, enter static in the BOOTPROTO= field. Type IPADDR= followed by the IP address (in dotted decimal notation) and type NETMASK= followed by the subnet mask. The following example shows an example where the static IP address is 192.168.1.10 and the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0. Figure 172 Red Hat 9.0: Static IP Address Setting in ifconfig-eth0 DEVICE=eth0 ONBOOT=yes BOOTPROTO=static IPADDR=192.168.1.10 NETMASK=255.255.255.0 USERCTL=no PEERDNS=yes TYPE=Ethernet P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 299 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address 2 3 If you know your DNS server IP address(es), enter the DNS server information in the resolv.conf file in the /etc directory. The following figure shows an example where two DNS server IP addresses are specified. Figure 173 Red Hat 9.0: DNS Settings in resolv.conf nameserver 172.23.5.1 nameserver 172.23.5.2 After you edit and save the configuration files, you must restart the network card. Enter ./network restart in the /etc/rc.d/init.d directory. The following figure shows an example. Figure 174 Red Hat 9.0: Restart Ethernet Card
[root@localhost init.d]# network restart Shutting down interface eth0: [OK]
Shutting down loopback interface: [OK]
Setting network parameters: [OK]
Bringing up loopback interface: [OK]
Bringing up interface eth0: [OK]
Verifying Settings Enter ifconfig in a terminal screen to check your TCP/IP properties. Figure 175 Red Hat 9.0: Checking TCP/IP Properties
[root@localhost]# ifconfig eth0 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:50:BA:72:5B:44 inet addr:172.23.19.129 Bcast:172.23.19.255 Mask:255.255.255.0 UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1 RX packets:717 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0 TX packets:13 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0 collisions:0 txqueuelen:100 RX bytes:730412 (713.2 Kb) TX bytes:1570 (1.5 Kb) Interrupt:10 Base address:0x1000
[root@localhost]#
300 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide APPENDIX B IP Addresses and Subnetting This appendix introduces IP addresses and subnet masks. IP addresses identify individual devices on a network. Every networking device (including computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to communicate across the network. These networking devices are also known as hosts. Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network. You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub-networks. Introduction to IP Addresses One part of the IP address is the network number, and the other part is the host ID. In the same way that houses on a street share a common street name, the hosts on a network share a common network number. Similarly, as each house has its own house number, each host on the network has its own unique identifying number - the host ID. Routers use the network number to send packets to the correct network, while the host ID determines to which host on the network the packets are delivered. Structure An IP address is made up of four parts, written in dotted decimal notation (for example, 192.168.1.1). Each of these four parts is known as an octet. An octet is an eight-digit binary number (for example 11000000, which is 192 in decimal notation). Therefore, each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary, or 0 to 255 in decimal. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 301 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting The following figure shows an example IP address in which the first three octets (192.168.1) are the network number, and the fourth octet (16) is the host ID. Figure 176 Network Number and Host ID How much of the IP address is the network number and how much is the host ID varies according to the subnet mask. Subnet Masks A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number, and which bits are part of the host ID (using a logical AND operation). The term subnet is short for sub-network. A subnet mask has 32 bits. If a bit in the subnet mask is a 1 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number. If a bit in the subnet mask is 0 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host ID. The following example shows a subnet mask identifying the network number (in bold text) and host ID of an IP address (192.168.1.2 in decimal). Table 113 Subnet Masks 1ST OCTET:
(192) IP Address (Binary) 11000000 2ND OCTET:
(168) 10101000 3RD OCTET:
(1) 00000001 4TH OCTET
(2) 00000010 Subnet Mask (Binary) 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 Network Number 11000000 10101000 00000001 Host ID 00000010 By convention, subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the leftmost bit of the mask, followed by a continuous sequence of zeros, for a total number of 32 bits. 302 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Subnet masks can be referred to by the size of the network number part (the bits with a 1 value). For example, an 8-bit mask means that the first 8 bits of the mask are ones and the remaining 24 bits are zeroes. Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses. The following examples show the binary and decimal notation for 8-bit, 16-bit, 24-bit and 29-bit subnet masks. Table 114 Subnet Masks BINARY 1ST OCTET 11111111 8-bit mask 2ND OCTET 00000000 3RD OCTET 00000000 4TH OCTET DECIMAL 00000000 255.0.0.0 16-bit mask 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 255.255.0.0 24-bit mask 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 255.255.255.0 29-bit mask 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111000 255.255.255.248 Network Size The size of the network number determines the maximum number of possible hosts you can have on your network. The larger the number of network number bits, the smaller the number of remaining host ID bits. An IP address with host IDs of all zeros is the IP address of the network (192.168.1.0 with a 24-bit subnet mask, for example). An IP address with host IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that network (192.168.1.255 with a 24-bit subnet mask, for example). As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts, calculate the maximum number of possible hosts in a network as follows:
Table 115 Maximum Host Numbers SUBNET MASK 8 bits HOST ID SIZE 24 bits 255.0.0.0 16 bits 255.255.0.0 16 bits 24 bits 255.255.255.0 29 bits 255.255.255.24 8 8 bits 3 bits Notation 224 2 216 2 28 2 23 2 MAXIMUM NUMBER OF HOSTS 16777214 65534 254 6 Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left, followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask, you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet. This is usually specified by writing a /
followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address. For example, 192.1.1.0 /25 is equivalent to saying 192.1.1.0 with subnet mask 255.255.255.128. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 303 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting The following table shows some possible subnet masks using both notations. Table 116 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation SUBNET MASK 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.128 255.255.255.192 255.255.255.224 255.255.255.240 255.255.255.248 255.255.255.252 ALTERNATIVE NOTATION
/24 LAST OCTET
(BINARY) 0000 0000 LAST OCTET
(DECIMAL) 0
/25
/26
/27
/28
/29
/30 1000 0000 1100 0000 1110 0000 1111 0000 1111 1000 1111 1100 128 192 224 240 248 252 Subnetting You can use subnetting to divide one network into multiple sub-networks. In the following example a network administrator creates two sub-networks to isolate a group of servers from the rest of the company network for security reasons. In this example, the company network address is 192.168.1.0. The first three octets of the address
(192.168.1) are the network number, and the remaining octet is the host ID, allowing a maximum of 28 2 or 254 possible hosts. The following figure shows the company network before subnetting. Figure 177 Subnetting Example: Before Subnetting You can borrow one of the host ID bits to divide the network 192.168.1.0 into two separate sub-
networks. The subnet mask is now 25 bits (255.255.255.128 or /25). The borrowed host ID bit can have a value of either 0 or 1, allowing two subnets; 192.168.1.0 /25 and 192.168.1.128 /25. 304 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting The following figure shows the company network after subnetting. There are now two sub-
networks, A and B. Figure 178 Subnetting Example: After Subnetting In a 25-bit subnet the host ID has 7 bits, so each sub-network has a maximum of 27 2 or 126 possible hosts (a host ID of all zeroes is the subnets address itself, all ones is the subnets broadcast address). 192.168.1.0 with mask 255.255.255.128 is subnet A itself, and 192.168.1.127 with mask 255.255.255.128 is its broadcast address. Therefore, the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an actual host for subnet A is 192.168.1.1 and the highest is 192.168.1.126. Similarly, the host ID range for subnet B is 192.168.1.129 to 192.168.1.254. Example: Four Subnets The previous example illustrated using a 25-bit subnet mask to divide a 24-bit address into two subnets. Similarly, to divide a 24-bit address into four subnets, you need to borrow two host ID bits to give four possible combinations (00, 01, 10 and 11). The subnet mask is 26 bits
(11111111.11111111.11111111.11000000) or 255.255.255.192. Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits, giving 26 - 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet (a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet itself, all ones is the subnets broadcast address). Table 117 Subnet 1 IP/SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER IP Address (Decimal) 192.168.1. IP Address (Binary) 11000000.10101000.00000001. Subnet Mask (Binary) 11111111.11111111.11111111. LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 0 00000000 11000000 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 305 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 117 Subnet 1 (continued) IP/SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE Subnet Address:
192.168.1.0 Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.63 Table 118 Subnet 2 Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.1 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.62 IP/SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER IP Address 192.168.1. IP Address (Binary) 11000000.10101000.00000001. Subnet Mask (Binary) 11111111.11111111.11111111. LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 64 01000000 11000000 Subnet Address:
192.168.1.64 Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.127 Table 119 Subnet 3 IP/SUBNET MASK IP Address Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.65 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.126 NETWORK NUMBER 192.168.1. LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 128 IP Address (Binary) 11000000.10101000.00000001. Subnet Mask (Binary) 11111111.11111111.11111111. 10000000 11000000 Subnet Address:
192.168.1.128 Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.191 Table 120 Subnet 4 IP/SUBNET MASK IP Address Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.129 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.190 NETWORK NUMBER 192.168.1. LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 192 IP Address (Binary) 11000000.10101000.00000001. Subnet Mask (Binary) 11111111.11111111.11111111. 11000000 11000000 Subnet Address:
192.168.1.192 Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.255 Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.193 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.254 Example: Eight Subnets Similarly, use a 27-bit mask to create eight subnets (000, 001, 010, 011, 100, 101, 110 and 111). The following table shows IP address last octet values for each subnet. Table 121 Eight Subnets SUBNET ADDRESS 0 SUBNET 1 2 32 306 FIRST ADDRESS 1 33 LAST ADDRESS 30 62 BROADCAST ADDRESS 31 63 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 121 Eight Subnets (continued) SUBNET 3 4 5 6 7 8 SUBNET ADDRESS 64 96 128 160 192 224 FIRST ADDRESS 65 97 129 161 193 225 LAST ADDRESS 94 BROADCAST ADDRESS 95 126 158 190 222 254 127 159 191 223 255 Subnet Planning The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 24-bit network number. Table 122 24-bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO. BORROWED HOST BITS 1 255.255.255.128 (/25) SUBNET MASK 2 NO. SUBNETS NO. HOSTS PER SUBNET 126 2 3 4 5 6 7 255.255.255.192 (/26) 255.255.255.224 (/27) 255.255.255.240 (/28) 255.255.255.248 (/29) 255.255.255.252 (/30) 4 8 16 32 64 255.255.255.254 (/31) 128 62 30 14 6 2 1 The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 16-bit network number. Table 123 16-bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO. BORROWED HOST BITS 1 SUBNET MASK 255.255.128.0 (/17) 2 NO. SUBNETS 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 255.255.192.0 (/18) 255.255.224.0 (/19) 255.255.240.0 (/20) 255.255.248.0 (/21) 255.255.252.0 (/22) 255.255.254.0 (/23) 255.255.255.0 (/24) 255.255.255.128 (/25) 255.255.255.192 (/26) 255.255.255.224 (/27) 255.255.255.240 (/28) 255.255.255.248 (/29) 255.255.255.252 (/30) 255.255.255.254 (/31) 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 NO. HOSTS PER SUBNET 32766 16382 8190 4094 2046 1022 510 254 126 62 30 14 6 2 1 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 307 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Configuring IP Addresses Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask. If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. If this is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.0. The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. You must also enable Network Address Translation (NAT) on the ZyXEL Device. Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address for your ZyXEL Device that is easy to remember (for instance, 192.168.1.1) but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address. The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your ZyXEL Device will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by the ZyXEL Device unless you are instructed to do otherwise. Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the Internet (running only between two branch offices, for example) you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:
10.0.0.0 10.255.255.255 172.16.0.0 172.31.255.255 192.168.0.0 192.168.255.255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP, or it can be assigned from a private network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses. Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address; always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment, please refer to RFC 1597, Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466, Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space. 308 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide APPENDIX C Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:
Web browser pop-up windows from your device. JavaScript (enabled by default). Java permissions (enabled by default). Note: Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here. Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary. Internet Explorer Pop-up Blockers You may have to disable pop-up blocking to log into your device. Either disable pop-up blocking (enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2) or allow pop-up blocking and create an exception for your devices IP address. Disable Pop-up Blockers 1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Pop-up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker. Figure 179 Pop-up Blocker You can also check if pop-up blocking is disabled in the Pop-up Blocker section in the Privacy tab. 1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options, Privacy. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 309 Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions 2 Clear the Block pop-ups check box in the Pop-up Blocker section of the screen. This disables any web pop-up blockers you may have enabled. Figure 180 Internet Options: Privacy 3 Click Apply to save this setting. Enable Pop-up Blockers with Exceptions Alternatively, if you only want to allow pop-up windows from your device, see the following steps. 1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options and then the Privacy tab. 310 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions 2 Select Settingsto open the Pop-up Blocker Settings screen. Figure 181 Internet Options: Privacy 3 Type the IP address of your device (the web page that you do not want to have blocked) with the prefix http://. For example, http://192.168.167.1. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 311 Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions 4 Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites. Figure 182 Pop-up Blocker Settings 5 6 Click Close to return to the Privacy screen. Click Apply to save this setting. JavaScripts If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer, check that JavaScripts are allowed. 312 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions 1 In Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab. Figure 183 Internet Options: Security 2 3 Click the Custom Level... button. Scroll down to Scripting. 4 Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected (the default). 5 Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected (the default). P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 313 Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions 6 Click OK to close the window. Figure 184 Security Settings - Java Scripting Java Permissions 1 2 3 From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab. Click the Custom Level... button. Scroll down to Microsoft VM. 4 Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected. 314 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions 5 Click OK to close the window. Figure 185 Security Settings - Java JAVA (Sun) 1 From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Advanced tab. 2 Make sure that Use Java 2 for <applet> under Java (Sun) is selected. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 315 Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions 3 Click OK to close the window. Figure 186 Java (Sun) Mozilla Firefox Mozilla Firefox 2.0 screens are used here. Screens for other versions may vary. You can enable Java, Javascript and pop-ups in one screen. Click Tools, then click Options in the screen that appears. Figure 187 Mozilla Firefox: Tools > Options 316 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions Click Content.to show the screen below. Select the check boxes as shown in the following screen. Figure 188 Mozilla Firefox Content Security P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 317 Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions 318 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide APPENDIX D Wireless LANs Wireless LAN Topologies This section discusses ad-hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies. Ad-hoc Wireless LAN Configuration The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent (Ad-hoc) WLAN that connects a set of computers with wireless adapters (A, B, C). Any time two or more wireless adapters are within range of each other, they can set up an independent network, which is commonly referred to as an ad-hoc network or Independent Basic Service Set (IBSS). The following diagram shows an example of notebook computers using wireless adapters to form an ad-hoc wireless LAN. Figure 189 Peer-to-Peer Communication in an Ad-hoc Network BSS A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless clients or between a wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point (AP). Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS. When Intra-BSS is enabled, wireless client A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other. When Intra-BSS is P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 319 Appendix D Wireless LANs disabled, wireless client A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other. Figure 190 Basic Service Set ESS An Extended Service Set (ESS) consists of a series of overlapping BSSs, each containing an access point, with each access point connected together by a wired network. This wired connection between APs is called a Distribution System (DS). This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN. The Access Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood. 320 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide An ESSID (ESS IDentification) uniquely identifies each ESS. All access points and their associated wireless clients within the same ESS must have the same ESSID in order to communicate. Figure 191 Infrastructure WLAN Appendix D Wireless LANs Channel RTS/CTS A channel is the radio frequency(ies) used by wireless devices to transmit and receive data. Channels available depend on your geographical area. You may have a choice of channels (for your region) so you should use a channel different from an adjacent AP (access point) to reduce interference. Interference occurs when radio signals from different access points overlap causing interference and degrading performance. Adjacent channels partially overlap however. To avoid interference due to overlap, your AP should be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an adjacent AP is using. For example, if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent AP is using channel 1, then you need to select a channel between 6 or 11. A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access point, but are not within range of each other. The following figure illustrates a hidden node. Both stations (STA) are within range of the access point (AP) or wireless gateway, but out-of-range of each other, so they P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 321 Appendix D Wireless LANs cannot "hear" each other, that is they do not know if the channel is currently being used. Therefore, they are considered hidden from each other. Figure 192 RTS/CTS When station A sends data to the AP, it might not know that the station B is already using the channel. If these two stations send data at the same time, collisions may occur when both sets of data arrive at the AP at the same time, resulting in a loss of messages for both stations. RTS/CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes. An RTS/CTS defines the biggest size data frame you can send before an RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake is invoked. When a data frame exceeds the RTS/CTS value you set (between 0 to 2432 bytes), the station that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS (Request To Send) message to the AP for permission to send it. The AP then responds with a CTS (Clear to Send) message to all other stations within its range to notify them to defer their transmission. It also reserves and confirms with the requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission. Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS/CTS directly to the AP without the RTS
(Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake. You should only configure RTS/CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on your network and the "cost" of resending large frames is more than the extra network overhead involved in the RTS
(Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake. If the RTS/CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value (see next), then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size. Note: Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy. Fragmentation Threshold A Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size (between 256 and 2432 bytes) that can be sent in the wireless network before the AP will fragment the packet into smaller data frames. A large Fragmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to interference while you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or networks that are prone to interference. 322 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs If the Fragmentation Threshold value is smaller than the RTS/CTS value (see previously) you set then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size. IEEE 802.11g Wireless LAN IEEE 802.11g is fully compatible with the IEEE 802.11b standard. This means an IEEE 802.11b adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802.11g access point (and vice versa) at 11 Mbps or lower depending on range. IEEE 802.11g has several intermediate rate steps between the maximum and minimum data rates. The IEEE 802.11g data rate and modulation are as follows:
Table 124 IEEE 802.11g DATA RATE (MBPS) MODULATION 1 DBPSK (Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed) 2 5.5 / 11 6/9/12/18/24/36/48/
54 DQPSK (Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying) CCK (Complementary Code Keying) OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) Wireless Security Overview Wireless security is vital to your network to protect wireless communication between wireless clients, access points and the wired network. Wireless security methods available on the ZyXEL Device are data encryption, wireless client authentication, restricting access by device MAC address and hiding the ZyXEL Device identity. The following figure shows the relative effectiveness of these wireless security methods available on your ZyXEL Device. Table 125 Wireless Security Levels SECURITY LEVEL Least Secure SECURITY TYPE Unique SSID (Default) Unique SSID with Hide SSID Enabled MAC Address Filtering WEP Encryption IEEE802.1x EAP with RADIUS Server Authentication Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) WPA2 Most Secure Note: You must enable the same wireless security settings on the ZyXEL Device and on all wireless clients that you want to associate with it. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 323 Appendix D Wireless LANs IEEE 802.1x In June 2001, the IEEE 802.1x standard was designed to extend the features of IEEE 802.11 to support extended authentication as well as providing additional accounting and control features. It is supported by Windows XP and a number of network devices. Some advantages of IEEE 802.1x are:
User based identification that allows for roaming. Support for RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service, RFC 2138, 2139) for centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server. Support for EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol, RFC 2486) that allows additional authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless clients. RADIUS RADIUS is based on a client-server model that supports authentication, authorization and accounting. The access point is the client and the server is the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server handles the following tasks:
Authentication Determines the identity of the users. Authorization Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are connected to the network. Accounting Keeps track of the clients network activity. RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay between the wireless client and the network RADIUS server. Types of RADIUS Messages The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user authentication:
Access-Request Sent by an access point requesting authentication. Access-Reject Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access. Access-Accept Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access. Access-Challenge Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access. The access point sends a proper response from the user and then sends another Access-Request message. The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user accounting:
324 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs Accounting-Request Sent by the access point requesting accounting. Accounting-Response Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting. In order to ensure network security, the access point and the RADIUS server use a shared secret key, which is a password, they both know. The key is not sent over the network. In addition to the shared key, password information exchanged is also encrypted to protect the network from unauthorized access. Types of EAP Authentication This section discusses some popular authentication types: EAP-MD5, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, PEAP and LEAP. Your wireless LAN device may not support all authentication types. EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) is an authentication protocol that runs on top of the IEEE 802.1x transport mechanism in order to support multiple types of user authentication. By using EAP to interact with an EAP-compatible RADIUS server, an access point helps a wireless station and a RADIUS server perform authentication. The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server and an intermediary AP(s) that supports IEEE 802.1x. For EAP-TLS authentication type, you must first have a wired connection to the network and obtain the certificate(s) from a certificate authority (CA). A certificate (also called digital IDs) can be used to authenticate users and a CA issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner. EAP-MD5 (Message-Digest Algorithm 5) MD5 authentication is the simplest one-way authentication method. The authentication server sends a challenge to the wireless client. The wireless client proves that it knows the password by encrypting the password with the challenge and sends back the information. Password is not sent in plain text. However, MD5 authentication has some weaknesses. Since the authentication server needs to get the plaintext passwords, the passwords must be stored. Thus someone other than the authentication server may access the password file. In addition, it is possible to impersonate an authentication server as MD5 authentication method does not perform mutual authentication. Finally, MD5 authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session key. You must configure WEP encryption keys for data encryption. EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security) With EAP-TLS, digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless clients for mutual authentication. The server presents a certificate to the client. After validating the identity of the server, the client sends a different certificate to the server. The exchange of certificates is done in the open before a secured tunnel is created. This makes user identity vulnerable to passive attacks. A digital certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the senders identity. However, to implement EAP-TLS, you need a Certificate Authority (CA) to handle certificates, which imposes a management overhead. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 325 Appendix D Wireless LANs EAP-TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Service) EAP-TTLS is an extension of the EAP-TLS authentication that uses certificates for only the server-
side authentications to establish a secure connection. Client authentication is then done by sending username and password through the secure connection, thus client identity is protected. For client authentication, EAP-TTLS supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as PAP, CHAP, MS-CHAP and MS-CHAP v2. PEAP (Protected EAP) Like EAP-TTLS, server-side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure connection, then use simple username and password methods through the secured connection to authenticate the clients, thus hiding client identity. However, PEAP only supports EAP methods, such as EAP-MD5, EAP-MSCHAPv2 and EAP-GTC (EAP-Generic Token Card), for client authentication. EAP-GTC is implemented only by Cisco. LEAP LEAP (Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol) is a Cisco implementation of IEEE 802.1x. Dynamic WEP Key Exchange The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server. This key expires when the wireless connection times out, disconnects or reauthentication times out. A new WEP key is generated each time reauthentication is performed. If this feature is enabled, it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key in the wireless security configuration screen. You may still configure and store keys, but they will not be used while dynamic WEP is enabled. Note: EAP-MD5 cannot be used with Dynamic WEP Key Exchange For added security, certificate-based authentications (EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS and PEAP) use dynamic keys for data encryption. They are often deployed in corporate environments, but for public deployment, a simple user name and password pair is more practical. The following table is a comparison of the features of authentication types. Table 126 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types EAP-TLS Yes EAP-MD5 No Mutual Authentication Certificate Client Certificate Server Dynamic Key Exchange Credential Integrity Deployment Difficulty No No No None Easy Client Identity Protection No EAP-TTLS Yes PEAP Yes Optional Optional Yes Yes Yes Yes LEAP Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Strong Strong Strong Moderate Hard No Moderate Moderate Moderate Yes Yes No 326 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide WPA and WPA2 Appendix D Wireless LANs Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard. WPA2 (IEEE 802.11i) is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption, authentication and key management than WPA. Key differences between WPA or WPA2 and WEP are improved data encryption and user authentication. If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external RADIUS server, use WPA2 for stronger data encryption. If you don't have an external RADIUS server, you should use WPA2-PSK (WPA2-Pre-Shared Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered into each access point, wireless gateway and wireless client. As long as the passwords match, a wireless client will be granted access to a WLAN. If the AP or the wireless clients do not support WPA2, just use WPA or WPA-PSK depending on whether you have an external RADIUS server or not. Select WEP only when the AP and/or wireless clients do not support WPA or WPA2. WEP is less secure than WPA or WPA2. Encryption WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP), Message Integrity Check (MIC) and IEEE 802.1x. WPA2 also uses TKIP when required for compatibility reasons, but offers stronger encryption than TKIP with Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) in the Counter mode with Cipher block chaining Message authentication code Protocol (CCMP). TKIP uses 128-bit keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by the authentication server. AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is a block cipher that uses a 256-bit mathematical algorithm called Rijndael. They both include a per-packet key mixing function, a Message Integrity Check
(MIC) named Michael, an extended initialization vector (IV) with sequencing rules, and a re-keying mechanism. WPA and WPA2 regularly change and rotate the encryption keys so that the same encryption key is never used twice. The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key (PMK) key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients. This all happens in the background automatically. The Message Integrity Check (MIC) is designed to prevent an attacker from capturing data packets, altering them and resending them. The MIC provides a strong mathematical function in which the receiver and the transmitter each compute and then compare the MIC. If they do not match, it is assumed that the data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped. By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating an integrity checking mechanism (MIC), with TKIP and AES it is more difficult to decrypt data on a Wi-Fi network than WEP and difficult for an intruder to break into the network. The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the same. The only difference between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific credentials. The common-password approach makes WPA(2)-PSK susceptible to brute-force P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 327 Appendix D Wireless LANs password-guessing attacks but its still an improvement over WEP as it employs a consistent, single, alphanumeric password to derive a PMK which is used to generate unique temporal encryption keys. This prevent all wireless devices sharing the same encryption keys. (a weakness of WEP) User Authentication WPA and WPA2 apply IEEE 802.1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using an external RADIUS database. WPA2 reduces the number of key exchange messages from six to four (CCMP 4-way handshake) and shortens the time required to connect to a network. Other WPA2 authentication features that are different from WPA include key caching and pre-authentication. These two features are optional and may not be supported in all wireless devices. Key caching allows a wireless client to store the PMK it derived through a successful authentication with an AP. The wireless client uses the PMK when it tries to connect to the same AP and does not need to go with the authentication process again. Pre-authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client (already connecting to an AP) to perform IEEE 802.1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it. Wireless Client WPA Supplicants A wireless client supplicant is the software that runs on an operating system instructing the wireless client how to use WPA. At the time of writing, the most widely available supplicant is the WPA patch for Windows XP, Funk Software's Odyssey client. The Windows XP patch is a free download that adds WPA capability to Windows XP's built-in "Zero Configuration" wireless client. However, you must run Windows XP to use it. WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example To set up WPA(2), you need the IP address of the RADIUS server, its port number (default is 1812), and the RADIUS shared secret. A WPA(2) application example with an external RADIUS server looks as follows. "A" is the RADIUS server. "DS" is the distribution system. 1 2 3 The AP passes the wireless client's authentication request to the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server then checks the user's identification against its database and grants or denies network access accordingly. A 256-bit Pairwise Master Key (PMK) is derived from the authentication process by the RADIUS server and the client. 328 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs 4 The RADIUS server distributes the PMK to the AP. The AP then sets up a key hierarchy and management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys. The keys are used to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients. Figure 193 WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example WPA(2)-PSK Application Example A WPA(2)-PSK application looks as follows. 1 2 3 4 First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients. The Pre-Shared Key (PSK) must consist of between 8 and 63 ASCII characters or 64 hexadecimal characters (including spaces and symbols). The AP checks each wireless client's password and allows it to join the network only if the password matches. The AP and wireless clients generate a common PMK (Pairwise Master Key). The key itself is not sent over the network, but is derived from the PSK and the SSID. The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process, the PMK and information exchanged in a handshake to create temporal encryption keys. They use these keys to encrypt data exchanged between them. Figure 194 WPA(2)-PSK Authentication P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 329 Appendix D Wireless LANs Security Parameters Summary Refer to this table to see what other security parameters you should configure for each authentication method or key management protocol type. MAC address filters are not dependent on how you configure these security features. Table 127 Wireless Security Relational Matrix AUTHENTICATION METHOD/ KEY MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Open ENCRYPTIO N METHOD None No ENTER MANUAL KEY IEEE 802.1X Disable Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Open WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Shared WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Yes Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Disable Yes Yes No Yes No Yes TKIP/AES TKIP/AES TKIP/AES TKIP/AES Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable WPA WPA-PSK WPA2 WPA2-PSK Antenna Overview An antenna couples RF signals onto air. A transmitter within a wireless device sends an RF signal to the antenna, which propagates the signal through the air. The antenna also operates in reverse by capturing RF signals from the air. Positioning the antennas properly increases the range and coverage area of a wireless LAN. Antenna Characteristics Frequency An antenna in the frequency of 2.4GHz (IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g) or 5GHz (IEEE 802.11a) is needed to communicate efficiently in a wireless LAN Radiation Pattern A radiation pattern is a diagram that allows you to visualize the shape of the antennas coverage area. Antenna Gain Antenna gain, measured in dB (decibel), is the increase in coverage within the RF beam width. Higher antenna gain improves the range of the signal for better communications. For an indoor site, each 1 dB increase in antenna gain results in a range increase of approximately 330 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs 2.5%. For an unobstructed outdoor site, each 1dB increase in gain results in a range increase of approximately 5%. Actual results may vary depending on the network environment. Antenna gain is sometimes specified in dBi, which is how much the antenna increases the signal power compared to using an isotropic antenna. An isotropic antenna is a theoretical perfect antenna that sends out radio signals equally well in all directions. dBi represents the true gain that the antenna provides. Types of Antennas for WLAN There are two types of antennas used for wireless LAN applications. Omni-directional antennas send the RF signal out in all directions on a horizontal plane. The coverage area is torus-shaped (like a donut) which makes these antennas ideal for a room environment. With a wide coverage area, it is possible to make circular overlapping coverage areas with multiple access points. Directional antennas concentrate the RF signal in a beam, like a flashlight does with the light from its bulb. The angle of the beam determines the width of the coverage pattern. Angles typically range from 20 degrees (very directional) to 120 degrees (less directional). Directional antennas are ideal for hallways and outdoor point-to-point applications. Positioning Antennas In general, antennas should be mounted as high as practically possible and free of obstructions. In point-topoint application, position both antennas at the same height and in a direct line of sight to each other to attain the best performance. For omni-directional antennas mounted on a table, desk, and so on, point the antenna up. For omni-directional antennas mounted on a wall or ceiling, point the antenna down. For a single AP application, place omni-directional antennas as close to the center of the coverage area as possible. For directional antennas, point the antenna in the direction of the desired coverage area. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 331 Appendix D Wireless LANs 332 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide APPENDIX E Services The following table lists some commonly-used services and their associated protocols and port numbers. Name: This is a short, descriptive name for the service. You can use this one or create a different one, if you like. Protocol: This is the type of IP protocol used by the service. If this is TCP/UDP, then the service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP. If this is USER-DEFINED, the Port(s) is the IP protocol number, not the port number. Port(s): This value depends on the Protocol. If the Protocol is TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP, this is the IP port number. If the Protocol is USER, this is the IP protocol number. Description: This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations in which this service is used. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 333 Appendix E Services Table 128 Examples of Services PROTOCOL NAME AH (IPSEC_TUNNEL) User-Defined PORT(S) 51 AIM AUTH BGP BOOTP_CLIENT BOOTP_SERVER CU-SEEME DNS TCP TCP TCP UDP UDP TCP/UDP TCP/UDP TCP/UDP ESP
(IPSEC_TUNNEL) User-Defined FINGER FTP H.323 HTTP HTTPS ICMP ICQ TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP User-Defined UDP IGMP (MULTICAST) User-Defined IKE IMAP4 IMAP4S IRC UDP TCP TCP TCP/UDP MSN Messenger TCP NetBIOS TCP/UDP TCP/UDP TCP/UDP TCP/UDP 5190 113 179 68 67 7648 24032 53 50 79 20 21 1720 80 443 1 4000 2 500 143 993 6667 1863 137 138 139 445 DESCRIPTION The IPSEC AH (Authentication Header) tunneling protocol uses this service. AOLs Internet Messenger service. Authentication protocol used by some servers. Border Gateway Protocol. DHCP Client. DHCP Server. A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software. Domain Name Server, a service that matches web names (for instance www.zyxel.com) to IP numbers. The IPSEC ESP (Encapsulation Security Protocol) tunneling protocol uses this service. Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on. File Transfer Protocol, a program to enable fast transfer of files, including large files that may not be possible by e-mail. NetMeeting uses this protocol. Hyper Text Transfer Protocol - a client/
server protocol for the world wide web. HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e-commerce. Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for diagnostic purposes. This is a popular Internet chat program. Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts. The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management. The Internet Message Access Protocol is used for e-mail. This is a more secure version of IMAP4 that runs over SSL. This is another popular Internet chat program. Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol. The Network Basic Input/Output System is used for communication between computers in a LAN. 334 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Table 128 Examples of Services (continued) Appendix E Services PROTOCOL TCP PORT(S) 5190 DESCRIPTION An Internet chat program. NAME NEW-ICQ NEWS NFS NNTP PING POP3 POP3S PPTP TCP UDP TCP 144 2049 119 User-Defined 1 TCP TCP TCP 110 995 1723 PPTP_TUNNEL (GRE) User-Defined 47 RCMD REAL_AUDIO REXEC RLOGIN TCP TCP TCP TCP ROADRUNNER TCP/UDP RTELNET RTSP TCP TCP/UDP SFTP SMTP SMTPS SNMP SNMP-TRAPS TCP TCP TCP TCP/UDP TCP/UDP 512 7070 514 513 1026 107 554 115 25 465 161 162 A protocol for news groups. Network File System - NFS is a client/
server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments. Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET news group service. Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable. Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e-mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection (TCP/IP or other). This is a more secure version of POP3 that runs over SSL. Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the control channel. PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the data channel. Remote Command Service. A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web. Remote Execution Daemon. Remote Login. This is an ISP that provides services mainly for cable modems. Remote Telnet. The Real Time Streaming (media control) Protocol (RTSP) is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet. The Simple File Transfer Protocol is an old way of transferring files between computers. Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message-exchange standard for the Internet. SMTP enables you to move messages from one e-mail server to another. This is a more secure version of SMTP that runs over SSL. Simple Network Management Program. Traps for use with the SNMP (RFC:1215). P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 335 Appendix E Services Table 128 Examples of Services (continued) NAME SQL-NET PROTOCOL TCP PORT(S) 1521 SSDP SSH STRM WORKS SYSLOG TACACS TELNET VDOLIVE UDP TCP/UDP UDP UDP UDP TCP TCP UDP 1900 22 1558 514 49 23 7000 user-
defined DESCRIPTION Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems, including mainframes, midrange systems, UNIX systems and network servers. The Simple Service Discovery Protocol supports Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP). Secure Shell Remote Login Program. Stream Works Protocol. Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server. Login Host Protocol used for (Terminal Access Controller Access Control System). Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments. It operates over TCP/
IP networks. Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems. A videoconferencing solution. The UDP port number is specified in the application. 336 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide APPENDIX F Open Software Announcements End-User License Agreement for P-873HNUP-51B WARNING: ZyXEL Communications Corp. IS WILLING TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE TO YOU ONLY UPON THE CONDITION THAT YOU ACCEPT ALL OF THE TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. PLEASE READ THE TERMS CAREFULLY BEFORE COMPLETING THE INSTALLATION PROCESS AS INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE WILL INDICATE YOUR ASSENT TO THEM. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS, THEN ZyXEL IS UNWILLING TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE TO YOU, IN WHICH EVENT YOU SHOULD RETURN THE UNINSTALLED SOFTWARE AND PACKAGING TO THE PLACE FROM WHICH IT WAS ACQUIRED OR ZyXEL, AND YOUR MONEY WILL BE REFUNDED. HOWEVER, CERTAIN ZYXELS PRODUCTS MAY CONTAININ PART-SOME THIRD PARTYS FREE AND OPEN SOFTWARE PROGRAMS WHICH ALLOW YOU TO FREELY COPY, RUN, DISTRIBUTE, MODIFY AND IMPROVE THE SOFTWARE UNDER THE APPLICABLE TERMS OF SUCH THRID PARTYS LICENSES (OPEN-SOURCED COMPONENTS). THE OPEN-SOURCED COMPONENTS ARE LISTED IN THE NOTICE OR APPENDIX BELOW. ZYXEL MAY HAVE DISTRIBUTED TO YOU HARDWARE AND/OR SOFTWARE, OR MADE AVAILABLE FOR ELECTRONIC DOWNLOADS THESE FREE SOFTWARE PROGRAMS OF THRID PARTIES AND YOU ARE LICENSED TO FREELY COPY, MODIFY AND REDISTIBUTE THAT SOFTWARE UNDER THE APPLICABLE LICENSE TERMS OF SUCH THIRD PARTY. NONE OF THE STATEMENTS OR DOCUMENTATION FROM ZYXEL INCLUDING ANY RESTRICTIONS OR CONDITIONS STATED IN THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT SHALL RESTRICT ANY RIGHTS AND LICENSES YOU MAY HAVE WITH RESPECT TO THE OPEN-SOURCED COMPONENTS UNDER THE APPLICABLE LICENSE TERMS OF SUCH THIRD PARTY. 1.Grant of License for Personal Use ZyXEL Communications Corp. ("ZyXEL") grants you a non-exclusive, non-sublicense, non-
transferable license to use the program with which this license is distributed (the "Software"), including any documentation files accompanying the Software ("Documentation"), for internal business use only, for up to the number of users specified in sales order and invoice. You have the right to make one backup copy of the Software and Documentation solely for archival, back-up or disaster recovery purposes. You shall not exceed the scope of the license granted hereunder. Any rights not expressly granted by ZyXEL to you are reserved by ZyXEL, and all implied licenses are disclaimed. 2.Ownership You have no ownership rights in the Software. Rather, you have a license to use the Software as long as this License Agreement remains in full force and effect. Ownership of the Software, Documentation and all intellectual property rights therein shall remain at all times with ZyXEL. Any other use of the Software by any other entity is strictly forbidden and is a violation of this License Agreement. 3.Copyright P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 337 Appendix F Open Software Announcements The Software and Documentation contain material that is protected by international copyright law, trade secret law, international treaty provisions, and the applicable national laws of each respective country. All rights not granted to you herein are expressly reserved by ZyXEL. You may not remove any proprietary notice of ZyXEL or any of its licensors from any copy of the Software or Documentation. 4.Restrictions You may not publish, display, disclose, sell, rent, lease, modify, store, loan, distribute, or create derivative works of the Software, or any part thereof. You may not assign, sublicense, convey or otherwise transfer, pledge as security or otherwise encumber the rights and licenses granted hereunder with respect to the Software. ZyXEL is not obligated to provide any maintenance, technical or other support for the resultant modified Software. You may not copy, reverse engineer, decompile, reverse compile, translate, adapt, or disassemble the Software, or any part thereof, nor shall you attempt to create the source code from the object code for the Software. Except as and only to the extent expressly permitted in this License, you may not market, co-brand, and private label or otherwise permit third parties to link to the Software, or any part thereof. You may not use the Software, or any part thereof, in the operation of a service bureau or for the benefit of any other person or entity. You may not cause, assist or permit any third party to do any of the foregoing. Portions of the Software utilize or include third party software and other copyright material. Acknowledgements, licensing terms and disclaimers for such material are contained in the License Notice as below for the third party software, and your use of such material is exclusively governed by their respective terms. ZyXEL has provided, as part of the Software package, access to certain third party software as a convenience. To the extent that the Software contains third party software, ZyXEL has no express or implied obligation to provide any technical or other support for such software other than compliance with the applicable license terms of such third party, and makes no warranty (express, implied or statutory) whatsoever with respect thereto. Please contact the appropriate software vendor or manufacturer directly for technical support and customer service related to its software and products. 5.Confidentiality You acknowledge that the Software contains proprietary trade secrets of ZyXEL and you hereby agree to maintain the confidentiality of the Software using at least as great a degree of care as you use to maintain the confidentiality of your own most confidential information. You agree to reasonably communicate the terms and conditions of this License Agreement to those persons employed by you who come into contact with the Software, and to use reasonable best efforts to ensure their compliance with such terms and conditions, including, without limitation, not knowingly permitting such persons to use any portion of the Software for the purpose of deriving the source code of the Software. 6.No Warranty THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS." TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, ZyXEL DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. ZyXEL DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET ANY REQUIREMENTS OR NEEDS YOU MAY HAVE, OR THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL OPERATE ERROR FREE, OR IN AN UNINTERUPTED FASHION, OR THAT ANY DEFECTS OR ERRORS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED, OR THAT THE SOFTWARE IS COMPATIBLE WITH ANY PARTICULAR PLATFORM. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE WAIVER OR EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THEY MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IF THIS EXCLUSION IS HELD TO BE UNENFORCEABLE BY A COURT OF COMPETENT JURISDICTION, THEN ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO A PERIOD OF 338 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements THIRTY (30) DAYS FROM THE DATE OF PURCHASE OF THE SOFTWARE, AND NO WARRANTIES SHALL APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD. 7.Limitation of Liability IN NO EVENT WILL ZyXEL BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE, OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE OR PROGRAM, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY, EVEN IF ZyXEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. ZyXEL's TOTAL AGGREGATE LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO ITS OBLIGATIONS UNDER THIS AGREEMENT OR OTHERWISE WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION OR OTHERWISE SHALL BE EQUAL TO THE PURCHASE PRICE, BUT SHALL IN NO EVENT EXCEED THE PRODUCTS PRICE. BECAUSE SOME STATES/COUNTRIES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. 8.Export Restrictions THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT IS EXPRESSLY MADE SUBJECT TO ANY APPLICABLE LAWS, REGULATIONS, ORDERS, OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS ON THE EXPORT OF THE SOFTWARE OR INFORMATION ABOUT SUCH SOFTWARE WHICH MAY BE IMPOSED FROM TIME TO TIME. YOU SHALL NOT EXPORT THE SOFTWARE, DOCUMENTATION OR INFORMATION ABOUT THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION WITHOUT COMPLYING WITH SUCH LAWS, REGULATIONS, ORDERS, OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS. YOU AGREE TO INDEMNIFY ZyXEL AGAINST ALL CLAIMS, LOSSES, DAMAGES, LIABILITIES, COSTS AND EXPENSES, INCLUDING REASONABLE ATTORNEYS' FEES, TO THE EXTENT SUCH CLAIMS ARISE OUT OF ANY BREACH OF THIS SECTION 8. 9.Audit Rights ZyXEL SHALL HAVE THE RIGHT, AT ITS OWN EXPENSE, UPON REASONABLE PRIOR NOTICE, TO PERIODICALLY INSPECT AND AUDIT YOUR RECORDS TO ENSURE YOUR COMPLIANCE WITH THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. 10.Termination This License Agreement is effective until it is terminated. You may terminate this License Agreement at any time by destroying or returning to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and Documentation in your possession or under your control. ZyXEL may terminate this License Agreement for any reason, including, but not limited to, if ZyXEL finds that you have violated any of the terms of this License Agreement. Upon notification of termination, you agree to destroy or return to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and Documentation and to certify in writing that all known copies, including backup copies, have been destroyed. All provisions relating to confidentiality, proprietary rights, and non-disclosure shall survive the termination of this Software License Agreement. 11.General This License Agreement shall be construed, interpreted and governed by the laws of Republic of China without regard to conflicts of laws provisions thereof. The exclusive forum for any disputes arising out of or relating to this License Agreement shall be an appropriate court or Commercial Arbitration Association sitting in ROC, Taiwan if the parties agree to a binding arbitration. This License Agreement shall constitute the entire Agreement between the parties hereto. This License Agreement, the rights granted hereunder, the Software and Documentation shall not be assigned by you without the prior written consent of ZyXEL. Any waiver or modification of this License P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 339 Appendix F Open Software Announcements Agreement shall only be effective if it is in writing and signed by both parties hereto. If any part of this License Agreement is found invalid or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, the remainder of this License Agreement shall be interpreted so as to reasonably effect the intention of the parties. NOTE: Some components of this product incorporate free software programs covered under the open source code licenses which allows you to freely copy, modify and redistribute the software. For at least three (3) years from the date of distribution of the applicable product or software, we will give to anyone who contacts us at the ZyXEL Technical Support (support@zyxel.com.tw), for a charge of no more than our cost of physically performing source code distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the complete corresponding source code for the version of the Programs that we distributed to you if we are in possession of such. Notice Information herein is subject to change without notice. Companies, names, and data used in examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted. No part may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, except the express written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation. This Product includes MIPS Linux kernel , Bridge-Utils, BusyBox 1.0.0 toolset , Dproxy, ebtables, bftpd, iproute2, iptables, udhcp and zebra software under GPL 2.0 license. GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2, June 1991 Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License 340 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software
(and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software. Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations. Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The
"Program", below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you". Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 341 Appendix F Open Software Announcements 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.) These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-
readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the 342 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it. 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License. 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 343 Appendix F Open Software Announcements
"any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. NO WARRANTY 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS"
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS All other trademarks or trade names mentioned herein, if any, are the property of their respective owners. This Product includes ppp software under below license This directory contains source code and precompiled binaries for ppp-2.4, a package which implements the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) to provide Internet connections over serial lines. ppp-
2.4 currently supports Linux and Solaris. All of the code here can be freely used and redistributed. Theindividual source files each have their own copyright and permission notice; some have a BSD-style notice and some are under the GPL. This Product includes Ssh server: dropbear software under MIT-style license 344 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements The MIT License Copyright (c) <year> <copyright holders>
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. This Product includes openssl: openSSL library software under BSD-style license Copyright (c) <YEAR>, <OWNER>
All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. Neither the name of the <ORGANIZATION> nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 345 Appendix F Open Software Announcements WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. 346 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide APPENDIX G Legal Information Copyright Copyright 2011 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into any language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation. Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. All rights reserved. Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice. Trademarks ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System) is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications, Inc. Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners. Certifications Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Statement The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operations. This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This device generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 347 Appendix G Legal Information If this device does cause harmful interference to radio/television reception, which can be determined by turning the device off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
1 2 3 4 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Radiation Exposure Statement This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. IEEE 802.11b or 802.11g operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmware-limited to channels 1 through 11. To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20 cm am must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons.
Notices
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada. This device is designed for the WLAN 2.4 GHz and/or 5 GHz networks throughout the EC region and Switzerland, with restrictions in France. 348 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Ce produit est conu pour les bandes de frquences 2,4 GHz et/ou 5 GHz conformment la lgislation Europenne. En France mtropolitaine, suivant les dcisions n03-908 et 03-909 de lARCEP, la puissance dmission ne devra pas dpasser 10 mW (10 dB) dans le cadre dune installation WiFi en extrieur pour les frquences comprises entre 2454 MHz et 2483,5 MHz. Appendix G Legal Information Viewing Certifications 1 Go to http://www.zyxel.com. 2 3 Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product's page. Select the certification you wish to view from this page. ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase. During the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, ZyXEL will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL. This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions. Note Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser. To obtain the services of this warranty, contact ZyXEL's Service Center for your Return Material Authorization number (RMA). Products must be returned Postage Prepaid. It is recommended that the unit be insured when shipped. Any returned products without proof of purchase or those with an out-dated warranty will be repaired or replaced (at the discretion of ZyXEL) and the customer will be billed for parts and labor. All repaired or replaced products will be shipped by ZyXEL to the corresponding return address, Postage Paid. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights that vary from country to country. Registration Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com for global products, or at www.us.zyxel.com for North American products. P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 349 Appendix G Legal Information 350 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Index Index A ACL rule 201 ACS 245 activation firewalls 197 SIP ALG 168 SSID 96 Address Resolution Protocol 225 ADSL compliance 275 alternative subnet mask notation 304 antenna 273 directional 331 gain 330 omni-directional 331 AP (access point) 321 applications Internet access 22 applications, NAT 172 ARP Table 225 ATM QoS 84 authentication 103, 104 RADIUS server 104 Auto Configuration Server, see ACS 245 B backup configuration 259 Basic Service Set, See BSS 319 Basic Service Set, see BSS blinking LEDs 25 broadcast 72 BSS 106, 319 example 106 C CA 211, 325 Canonical Format Indicator See CFI CBR 85 CCMs 262 certificate details 217 factory default 212 Certificate Authority See CA. certificates 211 authentication 211 CA creating 213 importing 215 public key 211 replacing 212 storage space 212 Certification Authority 211 Certification Authority. see CA certifications 347 notices 348 viewing 349 CFI 86 CFM 262 CCMs 262 link trace test 262 loopback test 262 MA 262 MD 262 MEP 262 MIP 262 channel 321 interference 321 channel, wireless LAN 102 client list 119 compliance 275 configuration backup 259 firewalls 197 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 351 Index reset 261 restoring 260 static route 137, 177, 242 Connectivity Check Messages, see CCMs copyright 347 CoS 154 CoS technologies 140 creating certificates 213 CTS (Clear to Send) 322 CTS threshold 100, 103 D data fragment threshold 100, 103 DDoS 196 default server address 168 Denials of Service, see DoS DHCP 116, 132 DHCP relay 274 DHCP server 274 Differentiated Services, see DiffServ 154 DiffServ 154 marking rule 154 digital IDs 211 disclaimer 347 DMZ 167 DNS 116, 133 Domain Name 172 Domain Name System, see DNS DoS 196 DS field 154 DS, dee differentiated services DSCP 154 DSL bonding 80 dynamic DNS 176 wildcard 176 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, see DHCP dynamic WEP key exchange 326 DYNDNS wildcard 176 E EAP Authentication 325 ECHO 172 e-mail log example 255 encapsulation 71 PPPoA 82 PPPoE 82 encryption 105, 327 ESS 320 Extended Service Set IDentification 90, 97 Extended Service Set, See ESS 320 F FCC interference statement 347 filters MAC address 97, 104 Finger 172 firewalls 195 add protocols 197 configuration 197 DDoS 196 DoS 196 LAND attack 196 Ping of Death 196 SYN attack 195 firmware 257 version 67 forwarding ports 160 fragmentation threshold 100, 103, 322 FTP 160, 172 G General wireless LAN screen 88 H hidden node 321 352 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide HTTP 172 humidity 273 I IANA 308 Internet Assigned Numbers Authority see IANA IBSS 319 IEEE 802.11g 323 IEEE 802.1Q 85 IGA 170 IGMP 72 Access Control List 186 ACL 186 filter 182 multicast group list 235 router alert option 180 statistics 236 IGMP proxy 276 IGMP snooping 179 IGMP v1 276 IGMP v2 276 ILA 170 importing certificates 215 Independent Basic Service Set See IBSS 319 initialization vector (IV) 327 Inside Global Address, see IGA Inside Local Address, see ILA interface group 189 Internet wizard setup 37 Internet access 22 wizard setup 37 Internet Group Multicast Protocol, see IGMP IP address 72, 83, 116, 133 ping 263 private 134 IP alias NAT applications 172 IP multicasting 276 Index L LAN 115 client list 119 DHCP 116, 132 DNS 116, 133 IP address 116, 117, 133 MAC address 120 status 67 subnet mask 116, 117, 133 LAN VLAN 131 LAND attack 196 LAN-Side DSL CPE Configuration 247 LBR 262 limitations wireless LAN 105 WPS 112 link trace 262 Link Trace Message, see LTM Link Trace Response, see LTR Local Area Network, see LAN login 29 passwords 29 logs 227, 231, 235, 253 Loop Back Response, see LBR loopback 262 LTM 262 LTR 262 M MA 262 MAC address 98, 120 filter 97, 104 MAC authentication 97 Mac filter 203 Maintenance Association, see MA Maintenance Domain, see MD Maintenance End Point, see MEP Management Information Base (MIB) 248 managing the device good habits 22 MBS 84 MBSSID 106 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 353 Index MD 262 MEP 262 MTU (Multi-Tenant Unit) 85 multicast 72 IGMP 72 Multiple BSS, see MBSSID multiplexing 83 LLC-based 83 VC-based 83 N NAT 159, 161, 169, 170, 308 applications 172 IP alias 172 example 171 global 170 IGA 170 ILA 170 inside 170 local 170 outside 170 port forwarding 160 port number 172 services 172 SIP ALG 168 activation 168 NAT example 173 Network Address Translation see NAT Network Address Translation, see NAT Network Map 65 network map 33 NNTP 172 O operation humidity 273 operation temperature 273 P Pairwise Master Key (PMK) 327, 329 passwords 29 PBC 107 PCR 84 Per-Hop Behavior, see PHB 154 PHB 154 PIN, WPS 108 example 109 Ping of Death 196 Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol 172 POP3 172 port forwarding 160 ports 25 power adaptor 276 power specifications 273 PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) Link Layer Protocol 276 PPPoA 82 PPPoE 82 PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet) 275 PPTP 172 preamble 101, 103 preamble mode 107 private IP address 134 product registration 349 PSK 327 push button 27 Push Button Configuration, see PBC push button, WPS 107 Q QoS 139, 154 marking 140 setup 139 tagging 140 versus CoS 140 Quality of Service, see QoS 354 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Index R RADIUS 324 message types 324 messages 324 shared secret key 325 RADIUS server 104 registration product 349 related documentation 3 remote management TR-069 245 Remote Procedure Calls, see RPCs 245 reset 26, 261 restart 261 restoring configuration 260 RFC 2516 275 RFC 3164 227 router alert option 180 router features 22 RPPCs 245 RTS (Request To Send) 322 threshold 321, 322 RTS threshold 100, 103 S safety warnings 5 SCR 84 security wireless LAN 103 Security Log 229 Security Parameter Index, see SPI service access control 223 Service Set 90, 97 Services 172 setup firewalls 197 static route 137, 177, 242 shaping traffic 84 Simple Network Management Protocol, see SNMP Single Rate Three Color Marker, see srTCM SIP ALG 168 activation 168 SMTP 172 SNMP 172, 247, 248, 276 agents 248 Get 248 GetNext 248 Manager 248 managers 248 MIB 248 Set 248 Trap 248 versions 247 SNMP trap 172 SPI 196 srTCM 156 SSID 104 activation 96 MBSSID 106 static route 135 configuration 137, 177, 242 example 135 static VLAN status 65, 68 firmware version 67 LAN 67 WAN 67 wireless LAN 68 status indicators 25 STB Vendor ID 129 storage humidity 273 storage temperature 273 subnet 301 subnet mask 116, 133, 302 subnetting 304 SYN attack 195 syntax conventions 3 syslog protocol 227 severity levels 227 system firmware 257 version 67 passwords 29 reset 26 status 65 LAN 67 WAN 67 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 355 wireless LAN 68 time 251 Index T Tag Control Information See TCI Tag Protocol Identifier See TPID TCI temperature 273 thresholds data fragment 100, 103 RTS/CTS 100, 103 time 251 TPID 85 TR-064 247 TR-069 245 ACS setup 245 authentication 246 trademarks 347 traffic shaping 84 example 84 transparent bridging 276 trTCM 156 Two Rate Three Color Marker, see trTCM U UBR 85 unicast 72 Universal Plug and Play, see UPnP upgrading firmware 257 UPnP 121 cautions 117 example 121 installation 121 NAT traversal 116 V VBR 85 VBR-nRT 85 356 VBR-RT 85 VCI 83 VDSL 275 VID Virtual Local Area Network See VLAN VLAN 85 Introduction 85 number of possible VIDs priority frame static VLAN ID 85 VLAN Identifier See VID VLAN tag 85 VPI 83 W WAN 71 ATM QoS 84 encapsulation 71 IGMP 72 IP address 72, 83 multicast 72 multiplexing 83 status 67 traffic shaping 84 example 84 VCI 83 VPI 83 warranty 349 note 349 web configurator 29 login 29 passwords 29 WEP 105 WEP Encryption 92, 93 WEP encryption 91 WEP key 91 Wide Area Network, see WAN Wi-Fi Protected Access 327 wireless client WPA supplicants 328 wireless LAN 87, 101 authentication 103, 104 BSS 106 example 106 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Index limitations 112 PIN 108 example 109 push button 27, 107 channel 102 encryption 105 example 102 fragmentation threshold 100, 103 limitations 105 MAC address filter 97, 104 MBSSID 106 preamble 101, 103 RADIUS server 104 RTS/CTS threshold 100, 103 security 103 SSID 104 activation 96 status 68 WEP 105 WPA 105 WPA-PSK 105 WPS 107, 109 example 110 limitations 112 PIN 108 push button 27, 107 wireless security 323 Wireless tutorial 46 wizard setup Internet 37 WLAN interference 321 security parameters 330 WPA 105, 327 key caching 328 pre-authentication 328 user authentication 328 vs WPA-PSK 327 wireless client supplicant 328 with RADIUS application example 328 WPA2 327 user authentication 328 vs WPA2-PSK 327 wireless client supplicant 328 with RADIUS application example 328 WPA2-Pre-Shared Key 327 WPA2-PSK 327 application example 329 WPA-PSK 105, 327 application example 329 WPS 107, 109 example 110 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 357 Index 358 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide Index P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide 359 Index 360 P-873HNUP-51B Users Guide
| frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 2011-06-01 | 2422 ~ 2452 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Original Equipment |
| app s | Applicant Information | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Effective |
2011-06-01
|
||||
| 1 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
ZyXEL Communications Corporation
|
||||
| 1 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0021059092
|
||||
| 1 | Physical Address |
No.2, Industry East Road IX, Science Park
|
||||
| 1 |
Hsinchu, N/A
|
|||||
| 1 |
Taiwan
|
|||||
| app s | TCB Information | |||||
| 1 | TCB Application Email Address |
t******@siemic.com
|
||||
| 1 | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
| app s | FCC ID | |||||
| 1 | Grantee Code |
I88
|
||||
| 1 | Equipment Product Code |
P873HNUP51B
|
||||
| app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
| 1 | Name |
E**** B********
|
||||
| 1 | Title |
Section Manager
|
||||
| 1 | Telephone Number |
886 3******** Extension:
|
||||
| 1 | Fax Number |
886 3********
|
||||
| 1 |
E******@zyxel.com.tw
|
|||||
| app s | Technical Contact | |||||
| n/a | ||||||
| app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
| n/a | ||||||
| app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
| 1 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
| 1 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
| if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
| app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
| 1 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 | Equipment Class | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||||
| 1 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | 802.11n VDSL2 Bonded 4-port Wi-Fi Gateway | ||||
| 1 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
| 1 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
| 1 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
| 1 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 | Grant Comments | Power listed is the maximum peak conducted output power. Device is operating in a 2T2R Spatial Multiplexing MIMO configuration as described in this filing. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-Users must be provided with transmitter operation conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. | ||||
| 1 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
| 1 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
| app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
| 1 | Firm Name |
Cerpass Technology (SuZhou) Co., Ltd.
|
||||
| 1 | Name |
M**** C******
|
||||
| 1 | Telephone Number |
86-05******** Extension:
|
||||
| 1 | Fax Number |
86-05********
|
||||
| 1 |
m******@cerpass.net
|
|||||
| Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 1 | 15C | 2412 | 2462 | 0.26546 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 2 | 15C | MO | 2422 | 2452 | 0.07907 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC